Copyright: (c)1995-2000 Campbell Scientific, Inc.


Programming with Edlog (CR10X)

You can use Edlog to create, document, and edit custom datalogger programs.  The topics are selected by clicking the mouse's left button or by pressing the Tab key and then the Enter key:

Getting Started

Step #1 -- click on File|New and select your type of datalogger

Step #2 -- enter an Execution Interval (seconds) for Table 1

Step #3 -- place the cursor on the blank line below the Execution Interval and click on Edit|Insert Instruction

Step #4 -- enter your required instructions in a logical sequence

HELP Navigational Aids

•	Menu Notation

•	Option Selection

•	Enable Options

Edlog Navigational Aids

•	Editor Keystrokes

•	General Input Location Information  (here is some required reading)

•	General Repetition Information

•	Instruction List -- Input/Output  (typically entered in the beginning of the program)

•	Instruction List -- Processing  (typically entered after the Input/Output Instructions)

•	Instruction List -- Output Processing  (typically entered toward the end of the program)

•	Instruction List -- Program Control (enter these where they do the most good)

•	Entering Comments

•	Entering Expressions

•	Errors And Warnings

•	Trace and Final Storage Label Files

•	Indexing Parameters

•	Creating a Library File

•	Selecting a Library File


Duplicate Location Name Error

Your program contains input locations that have the same label but different input location numbers.

For your program to run as expected, you MUST edit your input location labels so that they have unique labels.  The easiest method to catch the duplicate names is to use Edit | Input Labels.

If you loaded a program that was created using an earlier version of Edlog, this error might be the result of a version conflict.  Some earlier versions of Edlog allowed the character '#' to be used in the Input Location Label.  This version does not allow that character and automatically changes labels with that character to have a '_' instead.


Maximum Number of Input Locations is 9999

You have tried to create too may input locations.  You should edit your program to include a smaller number of input locations.


Version Conflict

You have just loaded a program that was created using an earlier version of Edlog.

Your earlier version of Edlog allowed the character '#' to be used in the Input Location Labels.  This version does not allow that character and has automatically changed labels that included that character to have a '_' instead.


Editor Keystrokes

 Keystroke	Description

 PgUp	Page up

 PgDn	Page down

 Enter	Move to next field or create new line

 <shift> Ins	Select an instruction from a dialog box

 <shift> Del	Delete the instruction or line under the cursor

 Up Arrow	Move up one line

 Down Arrow	Move down one line

 Right Arrow	Move one character right

 Left Arrow	Move one character left

<Esc>	Close dialog box

 <ctrl> n	Comment out a line or instruction (see Comments)

 <shift> <ctrl> n	Uncomment a line or instruction (see Comments)

 <end>	Add a comment to the right of the text (see Comments)

<ctrl> Home	Move cursor to beginning of file

 <ctrl> End	Move cursor to end of file

 <ctrl> PgUp	Move cursor to top of screen

 <ctrl> PgDn	Move cursor to bottom of screen

<ctrl> Right Arrow	Indent  instruction one tab right (cursor on parameter)

<ctrl> Left Arrow	Move instruction one tab left (cursor on parameter) or move from input location label to input location number

@	Marks the parameter for *4 mode


Indexing Parameters

Some parameters can be indexed.  The function of indexing varies according to the parameter.  See help for individual instructions to determine what parameters can be indexed.

To index a parameter, press the F4 function key while in the numeric or label field of the parameter, or the C key while in the numeric field of the parameter.  Two dashes will be displayed after the entry indicating the parameter has been indexed.

Pressing the respective key when a parameter is already indexed will toggle the index off.


Entering Comments

Comments are text that is ignored by the compiler.

Typically comments are added to make the program easier to read.  The compiler considers any line of text that has a semicolon as the first character to be a comment.

If you press <ctrl> n or select Edit|Comment while the cursor is on an instruction, the entire instruction will become a comment and will be ignored by the compiler.  By pressing <shift><ctrl> n or selecting Edit|Uncomment, the instruction will no longer be a comment.

Comments can also be added to the right of an instruction or an instruction's parameter.  This is accomplished by pressing the <end> key while the cursor is on the instruction or the instruction's parameter.


Expressions

Definition

Expressions are used to process numbers and input data.  When a datalogger program that contains an expression is compiled, the appropriate instructions are automatically incorporated into the .DLD file.  A variable number of input locations will automatically be assigned as "scratch pads" to store intermediate expression results.

Expressions can be entered anywhere in the table after the execution interval.

Entering Expressions

The following are the rules for entering expressions.  For more information, please see expression examples.

•	Expressions must be set equal to the label of the input location that will store the result.  The label must be to the left of the expression (e.g., label = expression).

•	Expressions can have both fixed numbers and input location labels.  Input locations can ONLY be referenced by their label; each number is always assumed to be a constant.

•	Fixed numbers are limited to five digits not including negative signs and decimal points.

•	Negative numbers should be enclosed in parentheses.

•	Fixed numbers can be entered in Scientific Notation (e.g., 25e3 = 25000, 6e(-1) = 0.6).  Like fixed numbers, the mantissa is limited to five digits.  The largest and smallest numbers that can be entered and processed are 9e18 and 1e(-19), respectively.

•	The operator(s) and/or function(s) used in the expression must be on the operator or function list.

•	Numbers and labels that are immediately after a function must be enclosed in parentheses.

•	Several operators and/or functions can be used in one expression.  Operations and functions that are enclosed in parentheses are calculated first; the inner most parentheses are evaluated first.

•	To continue an expression to the next line, type an _ at the end of the first line.

•	Expressions can have up to 255 characters

•	Expressions cannot be indexed.

Note:  The largest and smallest numbers that can actually be stored in an input location are 9e18 and 1e(-19), respectively.  However, PC208W's numeric monitor can only display five digit numbers (six with a leading zero).  If a location contains a number greater than 99998 or less than -99998, a 99999 or -99999 will be displayed, respectively.  If a location contains a number with more than five digits, the number displayed will be truncated from the right (e.g., 1234.56 will be displayed as 1234.5).


Operator & Function Lists

Operators  (see also expression examples)

*	multiply

/	divide

+ 	add

- 	subtract

^ 	raise to the power of

@ 	modulo divide

Functions  (see also expression examples)

COS	cosine (angle in degrees)

SIN 	sine (angle in degrees)

TAN 	tangent (angle in degrees)

COTAN 	cotangent (angle in degrees)

ARCTAN 	arctangent (angle in degrees)

ARCSIN 	arcsine (angle in degrees)

ARCCOS 	arccosine (angle in degrees)

ARCCOT 	arccotangent (angle in degrees)

SQRT 	square root

LN 	natural logarithm

EXP 	exponent of e (EXP(2) = e^2).  Exponents are limited to two characters and cannot include a decimal.

RCP 	reciprocal (RCP(4) = 1/4 = 0.25)

ABS 	absolute value

FRAC 	takes the fraction portion (FRAC(2.78)=.78)

INT 	takes the integer portion (INT(2.78)=2)


Expression Examples

Below are examples of valid expressions:

Zee = Vee+Ex

Root = SQRT(ABS(data))

avg = (data1+data2+data3+data4+data5)/5

length = SQRT((adj^2)+(opp^2))

TempF = (TempC*1.8)+32

Program Example

Below is a section of a datalogger program that uses an expression to convert Temperature from Celsius to Fahrenheit:

 Execution Interval = 10 sec

  1: Temperature (107)  (P11)

   01:   1    REPS

   02:   2    Channel

   03:   1    Excitation Channel

   04:   2    Loc [TempC]

   05:   1    Mult

   06:   0    Offset

 TempF = (TempC*1.8)+32

When this program is compiled, the .DLD file contains the following instructions.  The last 5 instructions calculate the expression.

 1:P11 (Temperature, 107)

  1:1

  2:2

  3:1

  4:2

  5:1.0

  6:0.0

 2:P31 (Z=X)

  1:2

  2:5

 3:P30 (Z=F)

  1:1.8

  2:0

  3:3

 4:P36 (Z=X*Y)

  1:3

  2:5

  3:5

 5:P30 (Z=F)

  1:32

  2:0

  3:3

 6:P33 (Z=X+Y)

  1:3

  2:5

  3:6


Modulo Divide and Expressions

Divides one number into another and stores the remainder.

Modulo divide expressions require a constant (floating point number) after the operator.

Examples:

When the expression is:    data=13@10, the input location 'data' stores a 3.

When the expression is:    Value = 5@2, the input location 'Value' stores a 1.

When the expression is:    amount=10@2, the input location 'amount' stores a 0.


Errors and Warnings

Errors and warnings occur after a file has been compiled in Edlog, and Edlog detects situations that might cause problems when the compiled program is downloaded to the datalogger.  However, a program may compile successfully in Edlog, and produce a compiler error when downloaded to the datalogger.  If this occurs, you'll receive the message "Failed DLD Transfer" along with an "E" number.

Errors

•	Burst Measurement Scan Rate too Short

•	Cannot use Control Port 6 as counter with Instruction 15 or SDM

•	CR10X was reset by watch dog timer

•	Decimal not allowed in an exponent

•	Duplicate *4 ID (see Using Mode 4)

•	Duplicate Subroutine

•	ELSE in SUBROUTINE without IF

•	ELSE without IF

•	Empty program

•	END without IF, LOOP, or SUBROUTINE

•	Equal sign expected

•	EXIT LOOP without LOOP

•	Exponents limited to 2 digits

•	Expression has more than 255 characters (see Entering Expressions)

•	Floating Point Numbers limited to 5 digits

•	Function expected

•	IF CASE without BEGIN CASE

•	IFs and/or LOOPs nested too deep

•	Illegal character, N<2, in Instruction 60 (FFT) parameter 1

•	Improper nesting of IFs and/or LOOPs

•	Inadequate Input Storage

•	Instruction 3 and interrupt subroutine use same port

•	Insufficient Input Storage

•	Intermediate Storage full

•	Missing END

•	Missing left parenthesis (see Entering Expressions)

•	Missing parameter

•	Missing right parenthesis (see Entering Expressions)

•	New line expected

•	No ELSE on error check stack

•	Nonexistent SUBROUTINE (see Command Codes)

•	Number expected

•	Right side of MOD operator allows constants only

•	Subroutine encountered before necessary END

•	Subroutine found in main program

•	Subroutines Nested too deep

•	Unable to decode execution interval (see Execution Interval Error)

•	Unknown Compiler Error

•	Unknown instruction

•	Unrecognized table

•	Unrecognized text

•	Variable name expected

•	Variable name longer than nine characters (see the Label requirement section under Input Location)

Warnings

Warnings announce situations where the program compiles but there might be unexpected results.

•	Array ID > 511; changed to 511 in DLD file

•	Array ID already used

•	Execution Interval for Table 1 is 0.0

•	Improper Use of Instruction 80

•	Inaccessible Instruction in Table 3

•	Invalid parameter value

•	Multiplier is set to zero

•	No Memory Allocated for Storage Area 2

•	Output Flag Not Set

•	Output instruction, line 9. Output Flag Not Set

•	RF Link ID Must Be < 256

•	Unused Subroutine


Variable name expected

This message occurs when the expression is not set equal to an input location label.

The label must be to the left of the expression, not enclosed in parentheses, and follow the input location label rules.

Example

'Variable name expected' is displayed when a program contains any of these expressions:   5=el*(Vee+en), 10-(zee/2)=bee, (lambda) = COS(theta), 8label=10*data.

These are correct ways of entering the above expressions:   five=el*(Vee+en), bee=10-(zee/2), lambda = COS(theta), label8=10*data.


Equal sign expected

In expressions, an equal sign MUST immediately follow the label of the input location that stores the results (e.g., label = expression).

Example

'Equal sign expected' is displayed when a program contains any of these expressions:   zee/2=bee, data+number=volt1+volt2.

These are correct ways of entering the above expressions:   bee=zee/2, data=volt1+volt2-number.


Floating point numbers limited to 5 digits

All fixed numbers are limited to five digits not including negative signs and decimal points.


Number expected

Indicates one of the following situations:

(1)	An expression with a /, *, or ^ operator is missing a number or label before and/or after the operator.

(2)	An expression with a + or - operator does not have a number or label after the operator.

(3)	An expression with an @ operator does not have a number after the @; only a fixed number is allowed immediately after the @ operator.

(4)	An expression with an @ operator does not have either a number or label before the @.

(5)	An expression has a pair of parentheses with nothing between them (e.g., the expression contains this "()").

(6)	An expression has a number that is immediately followed by a label or function without an operator (e.g., an expression containing '8label' gets this error message).

(7)	An expression has a negative number that occurs immediately after an operator and the negative number is not enclosed in parentheses (e.g., result = data + -5 will get this error; the expression should be entered as: result = data + (-5)).

Note:  You might have gotten this message for a valid parameter entry of zero if you kept the four default zeros (0000) created by Edlog instead of typing in a 0.


New line expected

Indicates one of the following situations:

(1)	An expression contains more than one equal sign.

(2)	An expression has no operator between two sets of parentheses.

Example:   This error message is displayed when a program contains any of these expressions:   zee=(label1)(label2), ex=(5)(ARCTAN(data)), eee=(em)(see^2).

These are correct ways of entering the above expressions:    zee=(label1)*(label2), ex=(5)*(ARCTAN(data)), eee=(em)*(see^2).

(3)	An expression has no operator between a set of parentheses and a number.

Example:   This error message is displayed when a program contains any of these expressions:    tee=5(2), mu=(nu)103, bee=10.52(ef/2), sigma=-17(RCP(alpha)).

These are correct ways of entering the above expressions:   tee=5*(2), mu=(nu)*103, bee=10.52*(ef/2), sigma=-17*(RCP(alpha)).

(4)	An expression has no operator between a set of parentheses and a label or function.

Example:   This error message is displayed when a program contains any of these expressions:   result=(ex^2)data, gamma=(10-omega)SIN(psi), dee=(17)number.

These are correct ways of entering the above expressions:   result=(ex^2)*data, gamma=(10-omega)*SIN(psi), dee=(17)*number.


Function expected

In expressions, letters that are immediately followed by parentheses are assumed to be a function.

If the letters are not on the function list, this error message occurs.


Intermediate Storage

Some processing and most output processing instructions store intermediate results in the Intermediate Storage.

Intermediate Storage is automatically accessed by the instructions and cannot be accessed by the user.

By default, 64 Intermediate Storage locations are available.  Edlog will compute the necessary memory allocations and include the information with the program sent to the logger.  You can change the amount of Intermediate Storage locations by using the *A mode in the keyboard/display.  If more Intermediate Storage is required than the amount allocated, an error occurs.

Caution:   Data stored in Final Storage area 1 are erased when the Intermediate Storage memory is increased or decreased.

Memory is taken from Final Storage area 1 when the Input, Intermediate, and/or final storage area 2 memory is increased.  Final Storage area 1 must have at least 1 data storage location.


Execution Interval for Table 1 is 0.0

When an Execution Interval is 0.0, measurements aren't made.

Sometimes, when debugging a program, the execution interval is intentionally zero.  This allows the user to check for errors by compiling the program without making measurements.


Unrecognized Text

Most likely, this error was the result of erroneously entering one of the following:

•	Comments -- the first character on the left must be a semi-colon.  For more information, see Comments.

•	Expressions -- must start with an input location label followed by an equal sign then a +, -, label, number, or function.  For more detailed information, see Entering Expressions.


Output Flag Not Set

This warning occurs when the output flag has not been set anywhere in the program.  The output flag must be set to store the measurements in Final Storage, and the measurements must be stored in Final Storage to transfer them to a storage module (SM716, SM192, or CSM1), or printer or to retrieve the data via a telecommunication link.


Output Instruction, Line 9. Output Flag Not Set

This warning occurs when an output instruction is found in the program, but the output flag is not set.  The instruction that sets the output flag may be omitted altogether, or the output processing instruction may appear before the output flag in the program.  In either case, measurements that you expect to be stored in Final Storage will not be stored there.  Measurements must be stored in Final Storage to transfer them to a storage module (SM716, SM192, or CSM1), or printer or to retrieve the data via a telecommunication link.


Inaccessible Instruction in Table 3

This warning occurs when Edlog finds an instruction in Table 3 that is not within a subroutine.  For more information, see Instruction 85.


No Memory Allocated to Final Storage Area 2

This warning occurs when Instruction 80 or Instruction 96 sends data to Final Storage area 2 and memory has NOT been allocated for storage area 2.  If you attempt to download the program to the datalogger, the download will fail.  The Options | Final Storage Area 2 is where the Final Storage area 2's memory is allocated.


Number Expected Warning

This warning occurs when a number is not entered for a parameter.  You might have gotten this warning for a valid parameter entry of zero if you kept the four default zeros (0000) created by Edlog instead of typing in a 0.


Improper Use of Instruction 80

This warning occurs if Instruction 80 does not immediately follow the command which sets the output flag high.


Unused Subroutine

This warning is displayed when there is a subroutine in table 3 but the subroutine is never called.

This warning is often a result of a typo for the command code of a program control instruction.


Watch Dog Timer

Checks the processor state, software timers, and program related counters.

If the processor has bombed or is neglecting standard system updates, or if the counters are outside the limits, the watch dog timer resets the processor and program execution.  Voltage surges and transients can cause the watch dog timer to reset the processor and program execution.

When the watch dog timer resets the processor and program execution, there will be an error code.  Frequent repetitions of this error indicate a hardware or software problem which should be reported to Campbell Scientific.


Input Storage

The Input Storage stores the results of measurements or calculations (see input/output and processing instructions).

Input Storage defaults to 28 locations.  Edlog will compute the necessary memory allocations and include the information with the program sent to the logger.  You can change the amount of Input Storage locations by using the *A mode in the keyboard/display.  If more Input Storage is required than the amount allocated, an error occurs.

Caution:   Data stored in Final Storage area 1 are erased when the Input Storage memory is increased or decreased.

Memory is taken from Final Storage area 1 when the Input, Intermediate, and/or Final Storage area 2 memory has been increased.  Final Storage area 1 must have at least 1 data storage location.


Execution Interval Errors

Invalid multiple of 1/64 second

Execution Intervals that are less than 1 second must be multiples of 1/64 (1/64, 1/32, 3/64, 1/16, ..., 15/16, 61/64, 31/32, 63/64).

Invalid multiple of 1/8 second

Execution Intervals that are between 1 and 32 seconds must be multiples of 1/8 (1, 9/8, 5/4, 11/8, ... , 63/2, 253/8, 127/4, 255/8).

Value must be <= 8191

All Execution Intervals must be less than or equal to 8191 seconds.

Note:   An execution interval of 0.0 for table 1 yields a Warning.


Input/Output Instructions

Measure sensors, control and communicate with external devices, and control some internal functions such as controlling the CR10X's timer.

The Input/Output instructions do not store measurements in Final Storage.  The data must be in Final Storage to transfer the data to a storage module (SM716, SM192, or CSM1), or printer or to retrieve the data via a telecommunication link.  Output Processing instruction are required to store the measurements in Final Storage.


Input/Output Instruction List (CR10X)

For a definition of input/output instructions, see Input/Output Instructions.

Instruction 1, VOLT (SE)

Instruction 2, VOLT (DIFF)

Instruction 3, PULSE

Instruction 4, EX-DEL-SE

Instruction 5, AC HALF BR

Instruction 6, FULL BR

Instruction 7, 3W HALF BR

Instruction 8, EX-DEL-DIFF

Instruction 9, FULL BR w/M EX

Instruction 10, BATT VOLT

Instruction 11, TEMP (107)

Instruction 12, R.H. (207)

Instruction 13, TC TEMP (SE)

Instruction 14, TC TEMP (DIFF)

Instruction 15, PORT SERIAL I/O

Instruction 16, RTD TEMP

Instruction 17, INTERNAL TEMP

Instruction 18, TIME

Instruction 19, SIGNATURE

Instruction 20, SET PORT

Instruction 21, PORT w/DURATION

Instruction 22, EXCITATION w/DELAY

Instruction 23, BURST MODE

Instruction 24, CALIBRATION

Instruction 25, READ PORTS

Instruction 26, TIMER

Instruction 27, PERIOD AVG (SE)

Instruction 28, VIB WIRE (SE)

Instruction 29, PS9104E

Instruction 100,  TDR MEASUREMENT

Instruction 101, SDM-INT8

Instruction 102, SDM-SW8A

Instruction 103, SDM-AO4

Instruction 104, SDM-CD16 & SDM-CD16AC

Instruction 105, SDI-12 RECORDER

Instruction 106, SDI-12 SENSOR

Instruction 107, SDM CSAT3

Instruction 108, SDM-UDG01

Instruction 109, SDMX50

Instruction 110, SDM GROUP TRIGGER

Instruction 113, SDM-SIO4

Instruction 114, SET TIME

Instruction 115, SDM BAUD

Instruction 117, DATALOGGER ID

Instruction 118, SDM CAN

Instruction 119, TDR100

Instruction 130, STATUS MONITOR

Instruction 131, VIBRATING WIRE

Instruction 132, SETTLING TIME

Instruction 189, SDM-LI7500


Processing Instructions

Allow data reduction, entry of simple algorithms, and conversion of raw data into engineering units.

As a short cut, data can be processed by entering an expression.  When an expression is entered, Edlog automatically incorporates the processing instructions into the .DLD file.

Some processing instructions store intermediate results in the intermediate memory.  Sufficient memory must be allocated to the Intermediate Storage or an error occurs.


Processing Instruction List (CR10X)

For a definition of processing instructions, see Processing Instructions.

Instruction 30, Z=F

Instruction 31, Z=X

Instruction 32, Z=Z+1

Instruction 33, Z=X+Y

Instruction 34, Z=X+F

Instruction 35, Z=X-Y

Instruction 36, Z=X*Y

Instruction 37, Z=X*F

Instruction 38, Z=X/Y

Instruction 39, Z=SQRT(X)

Instruction 40, Z=LN(X)

Instruction 41, Z=EXP(X)

Instruction 42, Z=1/X

Instruction 43, Z=ABS(X)

Instruction 44, Z=FRAC(X)

Instruction 45, Z=INT(X)

Instruction 46, Z=X MOD F

Instruction 47, Z=X^Y

Instruction 48, Z=SIN(X)

Instruction 49, SPA. MAX

Instruction 50, SPA. MIN

Instruction 51, SPA. AVG

Instruction 52, RUNNING AVERAGE

Instruction 53, A*X+B

Instruction 54, BLOCK MOVE

Instruction 55, POLYNOMIAL

Instruction 56, SAT.VP

Instruction 57, WB/DBT to VP

Instruction 58, LP FILTER

Instruction 59, Rf(X/(1-X))

Instruction 60, FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM

Instruction 61, INDIR MOVE

Instruction 62, COVARIANCE/CORRELATION

Instruction 63, EXTENDED PARAMETERS

Instruction 64, PAROSCIENTIFIC

Instruction 65, BULK LOAD

Instruction 66, Z=ARCTAN(X/Y)

Instruction 67, DYNAGAGE

Instruction 68, EXTENDED PARAMETERS 4-DIGIT


Output Processing Instructions

Process measured values collected over time and place the results in Final Storage.

Most output processing instructions also use the Intermediate Storage for holding on-going calculations.  If there is not sufficient memory allocated to the Intermediate Storage, an error occurs.


Output Processing Instruction List (CR10X)

For a definition of output processing instructions, see Output Processing Instructions.

Instruction 69, WIND VECTOR

Instruction 70, SAMPLE

Instruction 71, AVERAGE

Instruction 72, TOTALIZE

Instruction 73, MAXIMUM

Instruction 74, MINIMUM

Instruction 75, HISTOGRAM

Instruction 77, REAL TIME

Instruction 78, RESOLUTION

Instruction 79, SMPL ON MAX/MIN

Instruction 80, SET ACTIVE STORAGE AREA

Instruction 81, RAINFALL HISTOGRAM

Instruction 82, STD DEV


Program Control Instructions

Allow logic based on time or data and control serial data output and CR10X-initiated telecommunications.


Program Control Instruction List (CR10X)

For a definition of program control instructions, see Program Control Instructions.

Instruction 83, IF CASE LOCATION < F

Instruction 85, BEGINNING OF SUBROUTINE

Instruction 86, DO

Instruction 87, BEGINNING OF LOOP

Instruction 88, IF X<=>Y

Instruction 89, IF X<=>F

Instruction 90, STEP LOOP INDEX

Instruction 91, IF FLAG/PORT

Instruction 92, IF TIME IS

Instruction 93, CASE

Instruction 94, ELSE

Instruction 95, END

Instruction 96, SERIAL OUT

Instruction 97, INITIATE TELE

Instruction 98, SEND CHAR

Instruction 111, RUN FLASH

Instruction 120, DATA TRANSFER TO TGT

Instruction 121, DATA TRANSFER TO ARGOS ST-13

Instruction 122, INMARSAT-C DATA TRANSFER

Instruction 123, AUTOMATIC SETUP OF TGT1

Instruction 124, FIRE WEATHER DATA

Instruction 125, SDC2/ARGOS

Instruction 221, TRANSMIT ALERT/FLOWS PACKET


Menu Notation

Throughout Help, menus and their options will be denoted as the following:   XXX|YYY|ZZZ

Where

XXX  --  the original menu.

YYY  --  the menu's option.

ZZZ  --  the option's option.

Example:   FILE|OPEN denotes the open option under the file menu.


Option Selection

Choosing the Option with a Mouse

1.   Move your mouse to the desired option.

2.   Press the mouse's left button.

3.   Move your mouse to OK.

4.   Press the mouse's left button.

Choosing the Option without a Mouse

1.   Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option.

2.   Press the <tab> key.  This moves the cursor to OK.

3.   Press <enter>.


Enabling & Disabling Options

Options are enabled or disabled by using the <tab> key to place the cursor on the brackets and pressing the <space> bar or by selecting the brackets with the computer's mouse and pressing the left button.

An 'X' between the brackets indicates this option has been enabled and a space between the brackets indicates this option has been disabled.


Datalogger Choices

Instructions as well as other programming characteristics are datalogger specific, therefore you must choose your datalogger type before developing your Edlog program.

If you're unclear about your datalogger type, see the descriptions below:

CR10X	A small rectangular datalogger.  The wiring panel, power supply, and keyboard/display are all detachable.  The canister should have a red sticker that clearly labels the datalogger as a CR10X.  The wiring panel is most likely black.

CR10X-TD	Same as the CR10X except it uses table based data storage.

CR10  	Except for the sticker, the appearance is the same as the CR10X.  The wiring panel is either silver or black.

21X 	Choose this for programming both the 21X and 21XL.  These are compact dataloggers with built-in keyboard/displays and power supplies.

CR23X  	Incorporates features from both the CR10X and 21X, but is packaged similar to the 21X.  Like the 21X, it has a built-in keyboard/display and power supply.

CR23X-TD	Same as the CR23X except it uses table based data storage.

CR7 	A large modular datalogger that consists of a control module (700X) and I/O module (720 or 720XL).

CR10T 	This datalogger is used exclusively for RTMS applications.

CR510	A small rectangular datalogger.  The power supply and keyboard/display are detachable.  This datalogger has fewer channels than the CR10X.

CR510-TD	Same as the CR510 except it uses table based data storage.

CR500	Except for the silk screening, this datalogger has the same appearance as the CR510.  However, the CR500 has fewer capabilities (e.g., the CR500 only has one final storage area).


File Menu

The file menu is used to load, save, and exit Edlog files.  The options available under the file menu are:

•	New

•	Open

•	Save

•	Save As

•	View File

•	Close

•	Close All

•	Print

•	Print File

•	Print Setup

•	Document DLD File

•	Exit


New

Loads a template to create a new Edlog program.


Open

Loads an existing Edlog program for editing.

Caution -- A file that originally was programmed for one type of datalogger should not be edited to program another type of datalogger (e.g., don't edit a 21X file to program a CR10).


View File

Allows you to view a text file.  The editing functions will be disabled.


Save

Saves the current datalogger program.


Save As

Saves the current datalogger program under a new name.


Close

Closes only the active window.


Close All

Closes all of the windows.


Print

Sends an Edlog program to a printer.


Print to File

Creates a file with a .TXT extension.  These files are Edlog programs that can be printed or used with a text editor.


Print Setup

Selects the printer used when an Edlog program is printed.  The following is also selected under this menu:

•	Paper Orientation -- portrait, landscape.

•	Paper Size -- letter (8 1/2 x 11 in.), legal (8 1/2 x 14 in.), executive (7 1/2 x 10 in.), A4 (210 x 297 mm), Envelope #10 (4 1/8 x 9 1/2 in.), Envelope DL (110 x 220 mm), Envelope Monarch.

•	Paper Source -- upper tray, lower tray, manual feed, envelope feed, auto select.


Document DLD File

Creates a *.CSI file from a downloadable (*.DLD) file (see File Types).  This option is for editing a program that was originally entered using a datalogger's keyboard/display or an older version of Edlog.

Caution:  A .DLD file that originally was programmed for one type of datalogger should not be edited to program another type of datalogger (e.g., don't edit a 21X .DLD file to program a CR10).


File Types

*.CSI

The CSI file is the uncompiled program file created by Edlog.  This is the standard ASCII text file which can be viewed in Edlog, with View, or with any standard text editor.  When a file is retrieved for editing in Edlog, this is the file type which is retrieved.  The CSI extension is automatically assigned by Edlog when a program is saved.

*.DLD

When Edlog compiles a program (*.CSI), a DLD file is created.  This is the file format which is downloaded to the datalogger, and the type of file which is retrieved from the datalogger.  If an existing program file is edited and compiled, the old DLD file will be overwritten by the new file.  A DLD file can be documented (i.e., a CSI file can be created), by choosing File|Document DLD File.

*.DOC

Edlog versions 5.4 and earlier saved program files in a *.DOC file format.  These programs can be formatted for use with newer versions of Edlog by choosing File|Document DLD File.  Since the DLD file does not contain comments, documenting it will not preserve the comments in the original DOC file.  To retrieve the comments, use the separate DOS conversion utility, DOC2CSI.EXE.

*.FSL

FSL files contain a list of the final storage labels used in an Edlog program.  These files are used by PC208W's Report program (Split) to help select the parameters which will be used in parsing data.

*.LBR

Library files (*.LBR) are parts of a program which can be retrieved and used in other Edlog programs.  If a programmer often uses an instruction set in his/her datalogger programs, this partial file can be saved to disk and inserted into a new program quickly.  For information about creating a library file, see Creating a Library File.

Note:  Library files which are created for one type of datalogger should not be used in a different type of datalogger ( e.g., do not use an LBR file created for a CR10X in a 21X program).

*.TXT

Printer output files created by Edlog are saved with a TXT extension.  These files can be sent to a printer or viewed with a text editor.  A TXT file is created by selecting File|Print File.

*.PTI

Program trace information files (*.PTI) are created each time a program is compiled.  If an existing Edlog program is edited and recompiled, the old PTI file is overwritten.  These files provide information for the user on each datalogger program, such as instruction execution times, subroutine execution time, overall program execution times, and final storage information.


Exit

This option exits Edlog.  Whenever the program has not been saved and/or compiled, Edlog will ask whether the program should be saved and/or compiled.


Edit

This menu provides options for editing Edlog programs.  The options available under the Edit menu are:

•	Cut

•	Copy

•	Paste

•	Delete

•	Comment

•	Uncomment

•	Show Clipboard

•	Save Library File

•	Select Library File

•	Insert Instruction

•	Delete Instruction

•	Input Labels

•	View Final Storage Labels

•	View Mode 4 Settings (CR10, CR10X, & CR500 only)


Cut

This option allows sections of a program to be moved to another area of the program or to another program.

For a step-by-step procedure on moving text, see Cut, Copy, and Paste Procedures.

Caution: Instructions from one datalogger type must not be copied to another datalogger type (i.e., do not copy CR10X instructions to a program for a 21X). Some instructions vary among dataloggers. Downloading such a file to a datalogger can cause unpredictable results in datalogger operation, including loss of data.


Copy

This option allows sections of a program to be copied to another area of the program or to another program.

For a step-by-step procedure on moving text, see Cut, Copy, and Paste Procedures.

Caution: Instructions from one datalogger type must not be copied to another datalogger type (i.e., do not copy CR10X instructions to a program for a 21X). Some instructions vary among dataloggers. Downloading such a file to a datalogger can cause unpredictable results in datalogger operation, including loss of data.


Paste

This option is used with EDIT|CUT or EDIT|COPY to allow sections of a program to be moved or copied to another area of the program or to another program.

For a step-by-step procedure on moving text, see Cut, Copy, and Paste Procedures.

Caution: Instructions from one datalogger type must not be copied to another datalogger type (i.e., do not copy CR10X instructions to a program for a 21X). Some instructions vary among dataloggers. Downloading such a file to a datalogger can cause unpredictable results in datalogger operation, including loss of data.


Cut, Copy, and Paste Procedures

EDIT|CUT, EDIT|COPY, and EDIT|PASTE allow sections of the program to be moved or copied to another area of the program or to another program.

Caution: Instructions from one datalogger type must not be copied to another datalogger type (i.e., do not copy CR10X instructions to a program for a 21X). Some instructions vary among dataloggers. Downloading such a file to a datalogger can cause unpredictable results in datalogger operation, including loss of data.

The following steps are required for moving or copying sections of the program:

(1)	Either use the computer's mouse or the <shift> and arrow keys to select all of the text that will be moved or copied.

Note:   You cannot move or copy protected text (Tables, Execution Intervals).  To move or copy an Instruction, the entire instruction, including all of the parameters, must be selected.

(2)	Select EDIT|CUT (or CTRL+X) to move the text or select EDIT|COPY (or CTRL+C) to copy the text.

(3)	Move the cursor to the location where the moved or copied text will reside.

(4)	Select EDIT|PASTE (or CTRL+V) and the text is now moved or copied to the designated location.

Steps 3 and 4 can be repeated allowing text to be copied to many areas of the program.  Edit|Show Clipboard displays the text that is inserted if steps 3 and 4 are repeated.


Delete

Delete the text that has been selected.


Comment

Select Edit|Comment to make instructions, expressions, selected text, or the line under the cursor a comment.  Comments are ignored by the compiler.  If you select Edit|Comment while the cursor is on an instruction, the entire instruction will become a comment and will be ignored by the compiler.

Select Edit|Uncomment to make the instruction, expression, selected text, or the line under the cursor no longer be a comment.

For more information, see Entering Comments.


Uncomment

Select Edit|Uncomment to make the instruction, expression, selected text, or the line under the cursor no longer be a comment (comments are ignored by the compiler).  If you select Edit|Uncomment while the cursor is on an instruction, the entire instruction will no longer be a comment.

For more information, see Entering Comments.


Show Clipboard

Displays the text that has been cut or copied.  This text will be inserted into the program if Edit|Paste is used.


Save Library File

Library files are convenient when you need to create several programs that have common Instructions, Expressions, or Comments.

Steps for Creating a Library File:

(1)	Either use the computer's mouse or the <shift> and arrow keys to select all of the text you want to save in a library file.

Note:  The entire instruction, including all of the parameters, must be selected.

(2)	Select Edit|Save Library File

(3)	When a window appears, type in the Library file name and select OK.


Inserting a Library File into a Program

Library files can be inserted into any Edlog program.

Steps for inserting a library file into an Edlog program:

(1)	Move cursor to the location where the text will reside.

(2)	Select Edit|Insert Library File.

(3)	When a window appears, select the desired library file's name.


Insert Instruction

Allows an instruction to be selected from a list.


Insert Instruction

List the available instructions.  From this list, an instruction can be selected.

Selecting the Instruction using a mouse

1.   Move your mouse to the desired instruction.

2.   Press the left button on the mouse.

3.   Move your mouse to OK.

4.   Press the left button on the mouse.

Selecting the Instruction without using a mouse

1.   Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired instruction.

2.   Press the <tab> key.  This moves the cursor to OK.

3.   Press <enter>.


Delete Instruction

Deletes the entire instruction where the cursor is located.


Input Labels

Accesses the input location editor screen.


Input Locations Editor's Screen

This screen allows you to input and edit input locations.  Input location information is provided under these headings:

•	Addr

•	Name

•	Flags

•	# Reads

•	# Writes

•	Blocks

To edit the labels, the cursor is placed on the label and retyped.  The location numbers are edited by using this screen's editing menu.  The following editing commands are available:

•	Insert

•	Delete

•	Move

•	Toggle Manual

•	Optimize

•	Insert Block


Addr

Lists the input location number (address).


Name

Between the brackets, enter the input location label.

The input location label can have up to nine characters.  The first character must be a letter; the other characters can be letters, numbers, or _.  The following labels are reserved for expressions and should not be entered by the user:  CSI_R, CSI_2, CSI_3, . . . CSI_95.


Flags

Automatically displays an R, W, M and/or I, under these conditions:

R 	Indicates the input location has been read.

W	Indicates data are written to this location.

M 	Indicates the input location has been marked with the manual flag (see Manually Toggle).

I	Indicates the input location is part of an implied block.  Input locations are marked as implied when more than 299 input locations are inserted as a block at one time.  If more than 28 input locations exist in the program, only the first and last input locations in the block will appear in the Input Location Editor list.  If less than 28 input locations exist, the locations will be listed up to location number 28, and then all but the last one will be omitted from the list.


# Reads

Automatically displays the number of times the input location is read.


# Writes

Automatically displays the number of times that data are written to this location.


Blocks

Contains the word start when the input location is the initial location for a group of repetitions.

Contains the word member when the input location is part of a group of repetitions but is not the initial nor the last repetition.

Contains the word end when the input location is the last repetition.


Insert

Inserts one or more input locations before another location.  This might change several input location numbers.

Starting address -- enter the input location number before which the other location(s) will be inserted.

Number of Inlocs -- enter the number of input locations that will be inserted.

Note:  When you insert more than 299 input locations, Edlog displays only the first and last locations.

For more information, see insert example.


Delete

Deletes one or more input location(s).

Wherever the datalogger program references a deleted location, the input location number will become 0.  When an instruction has been deleted, its input location will still be on the location editor screen until the location has been deleted with this command or the optimize command has been used.

Starting address -- enter the input location number of the first location that will be deleted.

Ending Address -- enter the input location number of the last location that will be deleted.

For more information, see delete example.


Move

Moves one or more input locations to a different number.  This might change several input location numbers.

Starting address -- enter the input location number of the first location that will be moved.

Destination address -- enter the input location number where the locations will be moved.

Number of Inlocs -- enter the number of input locations that will be moved.

For more information, see move example.


Toggle Manual

Toggles the manual flag on and off for one or more input locations.  Input locations where the manual flag is toggled on will not be deleted or moved by the Optimize function.

Starting address -- enter the input location number of the first location that will be marked manual.

Ending Address -- enter the input location number of the last location that will be marked manual.

For more information, see Toggle to Manual example.


Optimize

Deletes input locations that aren't referenced or written to and aren't marked manual.

For more information, see Optimize example.


Insert Block

Creates a block of input locations.  This command also allows a range of locations to be labeled simultaneously and sets the manual flag for a range of locations.

Base Name:   Enter the base name.  For example, a base name of Data will create input locations labeled Data_1, Data_2, ...

Starting Address:   Enter the address of the first input location.

Number of InLocs:  Enter the number of input locations you want to create.

For more information, see Insert Block example.

Notes:

(1)	When you insert more than 299 input locations, Edlog displays only the first and last locations.

(2)	A warning screen appears when the input locations of repetitions are edited incorrectly.


Repetitions and the Input Location Editor

A warning screen will appear when attempting to:

(1)	Insert a location within a repetition block.

(2)	Delete one or more, but not all, of the members in a repetition block.

(3)	Move one or more, but not all, of the members in a repetition block.


Insert Example

Suppose the input location editor's screen is:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	-W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

When a line is inserted between 1 and 2, the screen becomes:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	-W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 6	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

The new input location numbers (3 for WindD, 4 for WindS) are automatically incorporated in the datalogger program, wherever WindD and WindS occur.

Suppose BatteryV is typed between the brackets on the inserted line.

If instruction 10 is added to the datalogger program with BatteryV as the input location label, the location number for instruction 10 will automatically become 2.

The input location editor screen will become:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	 -W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ BatteryV____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 6	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

Caution:   A warning screen appears when the input locations of repetitions are edited incorrectly.


Delete Examples

Example 1

Suppose the input location editor's screen is:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	-W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

If location 1 is deleted, the screen becomes:

1	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

In the datalogger program wherever TempC originally appeared, the input location number will become 0 and the data will not be stored.

Example 2

Suppose the input location editor's screen is:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

No R or W on the TempC line indicates this location is not referenced in the datalogger program.  The datalogger program will not be altered if this location is deleted.

Caution:   A warning screen appears when the input locations of repetitions are edited incorrectly.


Move Examples

Example 1

Suppose the input location editor's screen is:

 1	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ---------- ------- -----

 2	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ---------- ------- -----

 3	[ Data_1_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 START ------- -----

 4	[ Data_2_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 ------ MEMBER ---

 5	[ Data_3_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 -----  ---------- END

 6	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ---------- --------- ---

When location 1 is moved to location 6, the screen becomes:

 1	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ---------- --------- ---

 2	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ---------- ------- -----

 3	[ Data_1_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 START ------- -----

 4	[ Data_2_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 ------ MEMBER ---

 5	[ Data_3_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 -----  ---------- END

 6	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ---------- ------- -----

The number 6 will automatically be incorporated in the datalogger program, wherever WindD occurs.

Example 2

Suppose the input location editor's screen is:

 1	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ---------- ------- -----

 2	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ---------- ------- -----

3	[ Data_1_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 START ------- -----

 4	[ Data_2_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 ------ MEMBER ---

 5	[ Data_3_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 -----  ---------- END

 6	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ---------- --------- ---

When locations 3, 4, and 5 are moved to location 1, the screen becomes:

 1	[ Data_1_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 START ------- -----

 2	[ Data_2_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 ------ MEMBER ---

 3	[ Data_3_____  ]	 -W- 	0	1 -----  ---------- END

 4	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ---------- ------- -----

 5	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ---------- ------- -----

 6	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ---------- --------- ---

The new input location numbers (1 for Data_1, 2 for Data_2, 3 for Data_3, 4 for WindD, and 5 for WindS) are automatically incorporated in the datalogger program wherever the location labels occur.

Caution:   A warning screen appears when the input locations of repetitions are edited incorrectly.


Toggle Example

Suppose the input location editor's screen is:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	-W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 6	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

If the toggle manual command is used and location 3 is selected, the input location editor screen becomes:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	-W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ ___________  ]	 --M	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 6	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

If the user selects the optimize command, the input editor screen now becomes:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	-W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ ___________  ]	 --M	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 6	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

The new input location numbers (4 for WindD, 5 for WindS) are automatically incorporated in the datalogger program, wherever the WindD and WindS locations occur.


Optimize Examples

Example 1

Suppose the input location editor's screen is:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	-W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

When the optimize command is used, the screen becomes:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	-W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

The new input location numbers (2 for WindD, 3 for WindS) are automatically incorporated in the datalogger program, wherever the WindD and WindS locations occur.

Example 2

Suppose the input location editor's screen is:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	 ---	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ WindS______ ]	 ---	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

No R or W on the TempC and WindS lines indicate these locations are not referenced in the datalogger program.  When the optimize command is used, these locations are deleted and the input location editor screen becomes:

 1	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

A 1 is automatically incorporated in the datalogger program wherever WindD occurs.


Insert Block Example

Suppose the input location editor's screen is:

 1	[ TempC_____  ]	-W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ ___________  ]	 --- 	0	0 ----- ------ ---

If the Block command is used with:

Base Name:   Data

Starting Address:   2

Number of InLocs:   3

The input editor's screen becomes:

1	[ TempC_____  ]	-W-	0	1 ----- ------ ---

 2	[ Data_1_____  ]	 --M	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 3	[ Data_2_____  ]	 --M	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 4	[ Data_3_____  ]	 --M	0	0 ----- ------ ---

 5	[ WindD______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---

 6	[ WindS______ ]	RW-	1	1 ----- ------ ---


Final Storage Labels

Lists the final storage labels affected by the highlighted Output Processing Instruction.  If the cursor is not within an output processing instruction, a message will be displayed.


Final Storage Labels

Lists the final storage labels affected by the highlighted Output Processing Instruction.  If the cursor is not within an output processing instruction, a message will be displayed.


View Mode 4 Table

Displays the Mode 4 Table.


Mode 4 Table

Displays a table listing the mode 4 parameters.

Mode 4 allows a general program to be initially entered while the application specific details such as sensor calibration can be overwritten by entering them into the datalogger by using the keyboard/display.  For information on marking a parameter and for an example of Mode 4 use, see the Using Mode 4.


Using Mode 4

The Mode 4 Table is used to enter values into instruction parameters after the program has been compiled and downloaded to a datalogger.  Using Mode 4 allows you to develop a general program with variables for the parameter values; the variables refer to locations in the Mode 4 table.  Once the program has been downloaded to the datalogger, the values in Mode 4 table can be entered manually by the using the keyboard/display or PC208W's terminal mode.  When the program is recompiled, these values are pulled from the Mode 4 Table into the appropriate parameter location.

The procedure for using mode 4 is listed below:

(1)	While the cursor is on the parameter, enter the default parameter entry then type in @ or select the speed key.

(2)	A pop-up window is displayed.  Type in the mode 4 location number in the field provided.

Example:

A use for Mode 4 would be if you have a number of dataloggers that will be programmed identically, except for the calibration of an attached sensor.  The program can be developed incorporating the Mode 4 table, downloaded to each of the dataloggers, and the calibration information manually entered into each datalogger's Mode 4 table.


Search

This menu allows you to search for text.  This menu provides two options: Search and Search Again.


Search

Searches for text in the Edlog Program.  When this option is chosen, a dialog box appears that allows you to enter the text that will be searched.

This dialog box provides two options that by default are disabled:

•	Case Sensitive

•	Whole Words Only


Search Again

Searches for the text that was previously searched.


Compile

This menu is for compiling the program.  After a program has been written, it must be compiled for it to program a datalogger.


Compile

The compiler checks program syntax and attempts to discover programming errors.

The compiler also creates a .DLD file.  The .DLD file excludes all comments and incorporates the instructions required to calculate the expressions.  The .DLD file is what actually programs the datalogger.


Display

This menu controls the way the datalogger program is displayed.  The display menu has the following options:

•	Renumber

•	Rebuild Indention

•	Compress

•	Uncompress


Renumber

Renumbers the instructions so they are numbered sequentially.

Renumber is only required when Options|Editor|Automatic Renumbering is disabled.


Rebuild Indention

Undoes all manual indentions and rebuilds automatic indentions.

When instructions are edited, automatic indentions can get misaligned.


Compress Option

Select the compress option or press the F7 function key to display the first line of each instruction.  This enables the program structure to be easily seen.  Instructions cannot be edited while compressed.

To return to the normal view, select the uncompress option or press the F7 function key.


Uncompress Option

Select the uncompress option or press the F7 function key to return a compressed program to normal view.  A compressed program displays only the first line of each instruction.


Options

The available options under this menu are:

•	Editor

•	Show/Hide Toolbar

•	Font

•	Program Security

•	Final Storage Area 2

•	Datalogger ID

•	Power-Up Settings


Editor

The following options are available:

•	Automatic Renumbering

•	Data Entry Warning

•	Automatic Indentions

Number of spaces to indent (for Automatic and/or Manual Indentions)


Editor

The following options are available:

•	Automatic Renumbering

•	Data Entry Warning

•	Automatic Indentions

Number of spaces to indent (for Automatic and/or Manual Indentions)


Automatic Renumbering

When active, the computer automatically renumbers the program instructions whenever instructions are inserted or deleted (see example).

To improve performance on slow computers, the Automatic Renumbering can be disabled.


Automatic Renumbering Example

If a section of a datalogger program is initially the following:

 17:  Minimum (P74)

   01:   1    Rep

   02:   0    Value only

   03:   1    Loc TempC

 18:  Maximum (P73)

   01:   1    Rep

   02:   0    Value only

   03:   1    Loc TempC

 19:  End Table 1

Inserting instruction 71 between instructions 74 and 73, the numbers automatically become:

 17:  Minimum (P74)

   01:   1    Rep

   02:   0    Value only

   03:   1    Loc TempC

 18:  Average (P71)

   01:   1    Rep

   02:   1    Loc TempC

 19:  Maximum (P73)

   01:   1    Rep

   02:   0    Value only

   03:   1    Loc TempC

 20:  End Table 1

If instruction 74 is then deleted, the numbers become:

 17:  Average (P71)

   01:   1    Rep

   02:   1    Loc TempC

 18:  Maximum (P73)

   01:   1    Rep

   02:   0    Value only

   03:   1    Loc TempC

 19:  End Table 1


Data Entry Warning

Displays a warning when an invalid input is entered for a parameter.

The warning lists the valid inputs.  A valid input must be entered before the user can go to another parameter.


Automatic Indentions

Indents all If/Then/Else sequences and Loops.

To use the automatic indention, follow the procedure outlined below:

1.	Select Option|Editor.

2.	Enable the automatic indention option.

3.	In the indention box, type in the amount of spaces that the If/Then/Else sequences and Loops are to be indented and press <enter>.

See also Display|Rebuild Indention.


Manual Indention

To use, follow the procedure outlined below:

1.	Select Option|Editor.

2.	In the indention box, type in the amount of spaces that the instructions are to be indented and press <enter>.

3.	Move the cursor to the instruction that you want indented and press either <ctrl> left arrow or <ctrl> right arrow; the instruction is indented in the direction the arrow is pointing.

See also Display|Rebuild Indention.


Trace and Final Storage Label Files

Whenever you compile the program, a trace file and a final storage label file are created.

Trace File

This file has a .PTI suffix and lists execution time for each instruction, block (e.g., subroutine), and table as well as the number of Final Storage locations used per day (see example).

Note:  These execution times are estimates.  The PTI file does not account for If commands, Else commands, or repetitions of loops.  For some instructions, the execution times are listed as 0.  This occurs when the execution time is difficult to calculate (e.g., Instruction 23).

Final Storage Label File

This file has a .FSL suffix and lists the Final Storage labels.

Loading and Printing the Files

The files can be loaded into Edlog by using File|Open.  Once in Edlog, the files can be printed by selecting File|Print to Printer.


Trace File Example

The following is a file produced by the trace file option:

 Program Trace Information File for:   C:\CR10XPROG.CDF

 Date:  4/17/1996

 Time:  15:15:5

 T = Program Table Number

 N = Sequential Program Instruction Location Number

 Instruction = Instruction Number and Name

 Inst ExTm = Individual Instruction Execution Time

 Block ExTm = Cumulative Execution Time for program block, i.e., subroutine

 Prog ExTm = Cumulative Total Program Execution Time

  Output Flag High

-------------------------------

Inst	Block	Prog	Inst	Block	Prog

ExTm	ExTm	ExTm	ExTm	ExTm	ExTm

 T|N|Instruction	(msec)	(msec)	(msec)	(msec)	(msec)	(msec)

 1|1|11 Temp (107)	11.7	11.7	11.7	11.7	11.7	11.7

 1|2|14 Thermocouple Temp (DIFF)	17.2	28.9	28.9	17.2	28.9	28.9

 1|3|92 If time is	 0.3	29.2	29.2	 0.3	29.2	29.2

 Output Flag Set @ 13 for Array 103

 1|4|70 Sample             	 0.1	29.3	29.3	1.0	30.2	30.2

Output Data 1 Values

 1|5|92 If time is	 0.3	29.6	29.6	 	 0.3	30.5	30.5

 -------------Subroutine 1---------------

   3|1|85 Beginning of Subroutine	 0.0	 0.0	29.6	 0.0	 0.0	30.5

   3|2|96 Serial Out	 2.0	 2.0	31.6	 2.0	 2.0	32.5

   3|3|95 End	 0.2	 2.2	31.8	 0.2	 2.2	32.7

 ------------End Subroutine 1-----------

 Program Table 1 Execution Interval    10.000 Seconds

 Table 1 Estimated Total Program Execution Time in msec    31.8	w/Output    32.7

 Table 1 Estimated Total Final Storage Locations used per day    576.0

 --------------- Table 2 ---------------

 2|1|10 Batt Voltage	 4.8	 4.8	 4.8	 4.8	 4.8	 4.8

 2|2|92 If time is	 0.3	 5.1	 5.1	 0.3	 5.1	 5.1

 Output Flag Set @ 22 for Array 202

 2|3|70 Sample             	 0.1	 5.2	 5.2	 1.0	 6.1	 6.1

Output Data 1 Values

 Program Table 2 Execution Interval    60.000 Seconds

 Table 2 Estimated Total Program Execution Time in msec    5.2	w/Output    6.1

 Table 2 Estimated Total Final Storage Locations used per day    24.0

 Estimated Total Final Storage Locations used per day    600.0


Show/Hide Toolbar

When this option is set to "Show" the speed buttons are displayed.

Using your mouse to select these buttons is a faster method for performing various tasks such as saving a file.


Font

Allows you to customize the appearance of the text in the datalogger program.

The following characteristics can be set:

•	Font Type (Courier, Courier New, Fixedsys, MS LineDraw, Terminal)

•	Font Style (regular, italic, bold, bold italic)

•	Size

•	Effects (strikeout, underline)

•	Color


Program Security

By setting security in the datalogger, you restrict access to certain functions which helps ensure the program or data are not altered.

Entering Passwords

In the Program Security Dialog Box, there is a box for each level of security.  Enter a non-zero number in the appropriate box to enable security at the desired security level.  This number is used as a password to unlock the associated security level when needed.  If you choose to set level 02, level 01 must also be set.  Likewise, if you set level 03, levels 01 and 02 must be set.

Disabling Passwords

Passwords of 0000 disable the program security.  When you disable level 01, you also disable program security for levels 02 and 03.  Similarly, disabling level 02 disables level 03.  All passwords are set to 0000 upon power-up of the datalogger.  When the program is run, security is enabled.

Security Level 01

Blocks access to *1 -- Program Table 1; *2 -- Program Table 2; *3 -- Subroutine Table 3; *A -- Memory Allocation; *D -- Store, Load, and Print Programs.

Security Level 02

Blocks access to *4 -- Parameter Entry Table; *5 -- Datalogger Clock; *6 -- Input Storage Values, Ports and Flags.  When this level is enabled, you can view the settings but cannot change the them.

Security Level 03

Blocks access to *5 -- Datalogger Clock; *6 -- Input Storage Values, Ports and Flags; *7 -- Final Storage Values; *8 -- Manual Data Dump; *9 -- Storage Module Commands; *B -- Datalogger Status; all telecommunication commands except commands A (Datalogger Version, Error Counts, Data Pointer Locations, Backup Battery Status), L (Unlock Security), N (Set Datalogger as Transparent for use in communication links), and E (End Call).


Program Security

By setting security in the datalogger, you restrict access to certain functions which helps ensure the program or data are not altered.

Entering Passwords

In the Program Security Dialog Box, there is a box for each level of security.  Enter a non-zero number in the appropriate box to enable security at the desired security level.  This number is used as a password to unlock the associated security level when needed.  If you choose to set level 02, level 01 must also be set.  Likewise, if you set level 03, levels 01 and 02 must be set.

Disabling Passwords

Passwords of 0000 disable the program security.  When you disable level 01, you also disable program security for levels 02 and 03.  Similarly, disabling level 02 disables level 01.  All passwords are set to 0000 upon power-up of the datalogger.  When the program is run, security is enabled.

Security Level 01

Blocks access to *1 -- Program Table 1; *2 -- Program Table 2; *3 -- Subroutine Table 3; *A -- Memory Allocation; *D -- Store, Load, and Print Programs.

Security Level 02

Blocks access to *4 -- Parameter Entry Table; *5 -- Datalogger Clock; *6 -- Input Storage Values, Ports and Flags.  When this level is enabled, you can view the settings but cannot change the them.

Security Level 03

Blocks access to *5 -- Datalogger Clock; *6 -- Input Storage Values, Ports and Flags; *7 -- Final Storage Values; *8 -- Manual Data Dump; *9 -- Storage Module Commands; *B -- Datalogger Status; all telecommunication commands except commands A (Datalogger Version, Error Counts, Data Pointer Locations, Backup Battery Status), L (Unlock Security), N (Set Datalogger as Transparent for use in communication links), and E (End Call).


Final Storage Area 2

To use the Final Storage area 2, the desired number of Final Storage area 2 locations must be typed-in.  Otherwise only Final Storage area 1 is used.

Note:   If memory has not been allocated for Final Storage area 2 and Instruction 80 or Instruction 96 sends data to Final Storage area 2, a warning will be displayed.  If left uncorrected, the program will not download successfully to the datalogger.

For more information, see Advantages of Using Final Storage Area 2 and Number of Final Storage Area 2 Locations Available.


Advantages of Using Final Storage Area 2

Final Storage area 2's data are protected when Input and/or Intermediate Storage is reallocated; Final Storage area 1's data are erased when any of the memories are reallocated.

With two active Final Storage areas, the datalogger is allowed to:

•	Output different data to different devices.

•	Record a short history of real time data in one storage area and record long term data in the other.

•	Record both high (fast recording interval) and slow speed data without writing over the slow.


Number Of Final Storage Area 2 Locations Available

   Min    	Max

CR10X	     0	62,279

CR10X-1M	     0	553,800

CR10X-2M	114,689 	980,890

Memory is taken from Final Storage area 1 when the Input, Intermediate, and/or Final Storage area 2 memory is increased.  Final storage area 1 must have at least 1 data storage location.

Note:   If you allocate more than 553,800 locations for the CR10X-1M, the datalogger automatically reduces the number of locations to a value that allows the final storage area 1 to have at least 32,768 values.


Set Datalogger ID

Allows you to label a datalogger which is especially useful when you're retrieving data from several dataloggers.  By default, the datalogger does not have an ID (the ID is listed as zero).

For more information see, Datalogger ID.


Datalogger ID

Allows you to label a datalogger which is especially useful when you're retrieving data from several dataloggers.

By default, the datalogger does not have an ID (the ID is listed as zero).  Valid IDs are integers from 1 through 12 and 14 through 254.

You may use Instruction 117 to store this ID in an input location.  This allows the ID to be sampled (Instruction 70) and output as part of the data stream.


Select Power-Up Settings

Allows you to clear or retain the following when the CR10X is powered-up:

•	Port Status

•	Flag Status

•	User Timer

•	Input Storage

•	Intermediate Storage

For more information, see Power-Up Settings.


Power-Up Settings

This option allows you to clear or retain various settings when the CR10X is powered-up.

Whether it's advantageous to clear or retain these settings depends on your application.  For most applications, it's best to keep the default option of Do not change current datalogger Power-up settings.

Retaining the:

•	Port Status may be desirable depending on the functions of the devices that are being turned off or on.

•	Flag Status may be desirable depending on the functions of the flags.

•	User Timer allows you to continue timing events that occurred when the datalogger was on last.

•	Input Storage allows the values that were stored in the input locations before you turned the datalogger off to be included in the sample, average, and total when you turn the datalogger back on.

•	Intermediate Storage allows data processing to continue from when the datalogger was on last.


Window

The Window Menu determines the way multiple windows are displayed and which window is active.  The Window Menu cannot be used with help windows.

For other types of windows, the available options are tile and cascade.


Tile

Displays all windows on an equal portion of the computer screen.


Cascade

The active window covers all but the title bars of the other windows.


Active Window

The active window is the window where the cursor is located.  Only the program in the active window can be edited.

Initially the window that is active is the last window to be entered.  To change the window that is active, the computer's mouse is used to select the other window.  The window menu can also be used to change the window that is active.


Help

Three options are available under the help menu:

•	Contents

•	How to Use Help

•	About Edlog


How to Use Help

Describes using Window's help.


About Edlog

Lists version number and copyright date.


Single-Ended Channels on Silver Wiring Panel

Number on

    silver	Single-ended

wiring panel	channel entry

      1H  	         1

      1L	         2

      2H  	         3

      2L	         4

      3H  	         5

      3L	         6

      4H  	         7

      4L	         8

      5H  	         9

      5L	       10

      6H  	       11

      6L	       12

Example -- If REPS are 4 and the sensors are wired into the silver wiring panel's channels 3L, 4H, 4L, and 5H, the correct single-ended channel entry is 6.


Select Input Location

Lists all the existing input location labels.  From this list, you can select an existing label.


Input Locations

To successfully program your datalogger, you must understand Input Locations.

An Input Location is a place in the datalogger's memory where a measurement is temporarily stored until it is used in intermediate storage, output, or overwritten.  An input location is reserved for each measurement in the datalogger program.  Additional locations can be created by the user.

Each time an individual sensor is scanned, the new measurement overwrites the old.  You use Output Processing instructions to process the measurements and place the results in final storage.  Only data in Final Storage can be transferred to a storage module (SM716, SM192, or CSM1), printer, or tape, or retrieved via a telecommunication link.

Each Input Location has an input location number and a label that appears whenever the Input Location is called out in the program.

Entering Labels

When an Input Location is required by a programming instruction, the cursor initially is located between the brackets, which is where the label is keyed-in.  When a new label is entered, the next available input location number is automatically assigned to that label.  A list of existing labels can be accessed by pressing the <F6> function key.  From this list, you can select an existing labeled Input Location.

Label Requirements

Labels can have up to nine characters.  The first character must be a letter.  The allowed characters are numbers, letters, and '_'.  The following labels are reserved by Edlog for expressions and should not be entered by the user:  CSI_R, CSI_2, CSI_3, . . . , CSI_95.

Entering Location Numbers

To enter the input location number instead of the label, press <ctrl> left arrow.  This will move the cursor to where the location number is entered; the computer's mouse can also be used to move the cursor.

Reps

When REPS are greater than 1, the Input Locations are assigned consecutive numbers (e.g., with REPS of 2 and LOC of 5, the Input Locations are 5 and 6).

The Input Location's label for each repetition is the original label with an underscore and the next consecutive number appended to the end.

Example:   With 3 REPS and a label of 'data', the labels for each REP are: data_1, data_2, and data_3.

For more information about repetitions, see Repetition Information.

Editing Input Location Numbers and Labels

The Input Locations are edited by selecting the Input Labels Option in the EDIT menu or by pressing F5, see input location editor screen.

Input Location Anomalies

Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for the following instructions.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location's Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.

•	Instruction 15 -- Serial I/O with Control Port

•	Instruction 23 -- Burst Measurement

•	Instruction 49 -- Spatial Maximum

•	Instruction 50 -- Spatial Minimum

•	Instruction 54 -- Block Move

•	Instruction 75 -- Histogram

•	Instruction 80 -- Set Active Storage Area

•	Instruction 81 -- Rainflow Histogram

•	Instruction 100 -- TDR Measurement

•	Instruction 101 --SDM-INT8

•	Instruction 105 -- SDI-12 Recorder

•	Instruction 106 -- SDI-12 Sensor

•	Instruction 113 -- SDM-SIO4

•	Instruction 118 -- SDM CAN

•	Instruction 119 -- TDR100

•	Instruction 120 -- DATA TRANSFER TO TGT

•	Instruction 189,-- SDM-LI7500


Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog

For some instructions, Edlog does not automatically create all of the input locations that will be needed.

Example:

For Instruction 87 -- Loop, the instructions contained within the loop will be repeated the number of times specified in Parameter 2 of Instruction 87.  Instruction 87 can be configured to store the data for each output instruction in the same input location with each pass through the loop, or write the data to consecutive input locations with each pass through the loop.  Edlog does not automatically allocate the input locations when the option for consecutive input locations is chosen.  If they are not manually created and reserved for this instruction's use, other input locations could write to this area.  Therefore, the data generated from this scenario could overwrite existing locations or vice versa.

One of the simplest methods to reserve input locations for an instruction's use is to use the Insert Block function:

1.	From the Edlog menu, select Edit | Input Labels to open the Input Location Editor (or press F5 to quickly open the Editor).

2.	From the Input Location Editor's menu, choose Edit | Insert Block (or press F7).

3.	An Insert Block dialog box appears.  Type in a Base Name for the input locations.  Each input location added will have the name of the Base Name with an underscore and a consecutive number (e.g., a Base Name of Temp will create Temp_1, Temp_2, etc.).

4.	In the Starting Address field, type in the number of the first input location where you want to insert the new input location.

5.	In the Number of InLocs field, type in the number of Input Locations to be added, and select OK.

The specified number of input locations will be added at the location defined by the Starting Address field, and the input locations will be marked as Manual.  If an input location exists at the location specified by the Starting Address field, the existing input location (and any input locations that follow) will not be overwritten but will be moved to the next input location after the last of the newly inserted fields.

For more information, see:

•	Toggle Manual

•	Insert Block example


Repetition Information

Many input/output and output processing instructions have a repetition parameter.

Repetitions (REPS) allow one programming instruction to measure several identical sensors or to process data from several input locations.

Wiring Sensors

The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.  On the CR10X wiring panel, the differential channels have white numbers and the single-ended channels have blue numbers.  On the old CR10 silver wiring panel, the channels are numbered for differential measurements.  For single-ended measurements, the consecutive channel after 1H is 1L, after 1L is 2H, after 2H is 2L, etc.

Input Location Numbers and Labels

When REPS are greater than 1, the input locations are assigned consecutive numbers (e.g., with REPS of 2 and LOC of 5, the input locations are 5 and 6).

The input location's label for each repetition is the original label with an underscore and the next consecutive number appended to the end.

Example:    With 3 REPS and a label of 'data', the labels for each REP are: data_1, data_2, and data_3.

Only the first location of an output processing instruction is linked to the label.  Reps of input/output instructions and output processing instructions are not linked.

Example:   When the following is a section of an Edlog program, the TempC and BatteryV input locations are sampled.

  10: Temperature (107)  (P11)

   01:   1    REPS

   02:   2    Channel

   03:   1    Excitation Channel

   04:   1    Loc [TempC]

   05:   1    Mult

   06:   0    Offset

  11: Battery, Volt  (P10)

   01:   2    Loc [BatteryV]

  12: If time is  (P92)

   01:   0    minutes into interval

   02:  60    minute interval

   03:  10    Set high Flag 0 (output)

  13: Sample  (P70)

   01:   2   Reps

   02:   1   Loc [TempC]

NOTE:   If an input location is inserted between the TempC and BatteryV location, the inserted location will be sampled instead of BatteryV.


Repetition Increased Warning

If you increase the number of repetitions and at least one of the consecutive locations has been already assigned, this warning will appear.

You will have the following options:

Make Room -- the input location numbers of the other instructions will be revised so that they won't write to the repetition's locations.

Move Reps Block -- the initial input location will be reassigned another number to rectify the situation.

OK -- the situation will not be remedied; the repetitions will write to redundant input locations.

Caution:   If you select the OK button, the datalogger program will compile but the data stored in the affected input locations might be meaningless.

Cancel -- the instruction will be returned to the unedited form.


Program Tables

For the datalogger program to execute correctly, the instructions must be entered in a program table.  There are three program tables:

•	Tables 1 and 2 -- instructions for the main program can be entered in Table 1 and/or Table 2.  Both Table 1 and Table 2 have their own user-designated Execution Interval.  If only one program table is used, it's typically Table 1.

•	Table 3 (Subroutine Table) -- subroutine instructions are entered in this table.  The first instruction entered in Table 3 should always be Instruction 85 which is used to label the first subroutine.  For the subroutines to be run, a Program Control Instruction must be entered in either Table 1 or 2 that calls out the subroutine.


Program Tables

For the datalogger program to execute correctly, the instructions must be entered in a program table.  There are three program tables:

•	Tables 1 and 2 -- instructions for the main program can be entered in Table 1 and/or Table 2.  Both Table 1 and Table 2 have their own user-designated execution interval.

•	Table 3 or Subroutine Table -- subroutine instructions are entered in this table.  The first instruction entered in Table 3 should always be Instruction 85 which is used to label the first subroutine.


Execution Interval

The execution interval is the length of time (in seconds) between program executions.

Example:   When the Execution Interval is 300 sec. (5 min.), the program is executed every 5 min.

Every Edlog program must have a valid execution interval (see below) or an execution interval error occurs.  Table 1's execution interval can be 0.0 but the measurements aren't made and there is a warning.

   Valid entries are

     multiples of:	for Range of:

1/64 or 0.015625 sec.   	1/64 to 1 sec.

1/8 or 0.125 sec.	1 to 32 sec.

1 sec.  	32 to 8191 sec.


Execution Interval

The execution interval is the length of time (in seconds) between program executions.

Valid entries are

     multiples of:	for Range of:

1/64 or 0.015625 sec.   	1/64 to 1 sec.

1/8 or 0.125 sec.	1 to 32 sec.

1 sec.  	32 to 8191 sec.

Example:   When the Execution Interval is 300 sec. (5 min.), the program is executed every 5 min.

Every Edlog program must have a valid execution interval (see below) or an execution interval error occurs.  Table 1's execution interval can be 0.0 but the measurements aren't made and there is a compiler warning.


Empty Line

You may enter:

•	Instructions -- enter the instruction number or access the instruction dialog box by clicking the right mouse button or pressing the <shift> <insert> keys.

•	Comments -- the first character on the left must be a semi-colon.  For more information, see Comments.

•	Expressions -- enter a mathematical expression to process data or numbers.  For the rules on entering expressions, see Entering Expressions.


Unknown Text

Warning:   This text is unknown to Edlog.  If you do not edit this text before you compile the program, you will get the error 'unrecognized text'.

Most likely, you erroneously entered one of the following:

•	Comments -- the first character on the left must be a semi-colon.  For more information, see Comments.

•	Expressions -- must start with an input location label followed by an equal sign then a +, -, label, number, or function.  For more detailed information, see Entering Expressions.


Instruction 1 - Volt, Single-Ended (SE)

An Input/Output Instruction that measures the input's voltage with respect to ground; output is in millivolts.

Sensors that are often measured with Volt (SE) include pyrometers, soil heat flux plates, and radiometers.

A similar instruction is available for differential measurements (see comparison).

Instruction 1 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Single-Ended Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 5 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 6 -- Offset


Comparison of Single-ended and Differential Measurements

Differential Measurements

Measure the voltage between two inputs; both inputs must be within the common mode range of +2.5 Volts.  Differential measurements may eliminate errors due to a difference in ground potential between the CR10X and the sensor, such as when external signal conditioning circuitry is powered from the same source as the CR10X.  Differential measurements have better noise rejection than single-ended measurements.

Single-ended Measurements

Measure the input's voltage with respect to ground.  Twice as many channels are available for single-ended measurements.


Repetitions

The number of sensors measured with this instruction.

Each measurement uses the same range, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

The number of sensors measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Range

       Integration Methods

-------------------------------------------

60 Hz	50 Hz	|	Full Scale

Slow 	Fast 	  Rej 	  Rej	|	   Range

  00	  10	   20	  30	|	autorange

  01	  11	   21	  31	|	+   2.5 mV

  02	  12	   22	  32	|	+   7.5 mV

  03	  13	   23	  33	|	+  25 mV

  04	  14	   24	  34	|	+ 250 mV

  05	  15	   25	  35	|	+2500 mV

Example -- An entry of 15 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +2500 mV.

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


Integration Methods and Autorange Description

Slow Integration (2.72 ms)

Provides a more noise-free reading than the fast integration.

Fast Integration (250 microseconds)

Minimizes time skew between measurements, has a higher throughput rate, and uses less power than the slow integration.

60 Hz Rejection

Eliminates noise from AC power lines in countries that use 60 Hz power.

50 Hz Rejection

Eliminates noise from AC power lines in countries that use 50 Hz power.

Autorange Description

The autorange option is available for operating system versions greater than 1.9.  When this option is chosen (i.e., option 00, 10, 20, or 30), each time an instruction is executed, the datalogger starts at the bottom of the range and tries that value, then tries the next, and keeps trying until it gets a good reading from the sensor.  It doesn't store this range code anywhere, so it goes through this process with each scan.

Note that the autorange option can significantly affect the program's execution time, especially for sensors which output voltages in the upper voltage ranges.  The execution times listed in the .PTI file will probably be incorrect for instructions that use this option because the .PTI file cannot take into account the scanning of all the options.


Single-Ended Channel

The analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel, see SE Chart.


Single-Ended Channel

The analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.


Location

The input location which will store this instruction's first measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Multiplier

A factor that the input location value is multiplied by.  A multiplier of 1 has no effect on the input location value.

A multiplier is often used for calibration or to convert the input location value to different units.


Offset

A value that is added to or subtracted from the input location.  An offset of 0 has no effect on the input location value.

An offset is often used for calibration or to convert the data to different units.


Multiplier

A factor that the input location value is multiplied by.  A multiplier of 1 has no effect on the input location value.

A multiplier is often used for calibration or to convert the input location value to different units.


Offset

A value that is added to or subtracted from the input location.  An offset of 0 has no effect on the input location value.

An offset is often used for calibration or to convert the data to different units.


Instruction 2 - Volt, Differential

An Input/Output Instruction that measures the voltage between two inputs; both inputs must be within the common mode range of +2.5 Volts.  Output is in millivolts.

Sensors that are often measured with Volt (DIFF) include pyrometers, soil heat flux plates, and radiometers.

A similar instruction is available for single-ended measurements (see comparison).

Instruction 2 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Differential Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 5 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 6 -- Offset


Repetitions

The number of sensors measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

The number of sensors measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Range

       Integration Methods

-------------------------------------------

60 Hz	50 Hz	|	Full Scale

Slow 	Fast 	  Rej 	  Rej	|	   Range

  00	  10	   20	  30	|	autorange

  01	  11	   21	  31	|	+   2.5 mV

  02	  12	   22	  32	|	+   7.5 mV

  03	  13	   23	  33	|	+  25 mV

  04	  14	   24	  34	|	+ 250 mV

  05	  15	   25	  35	|	+2500 mV

Example -- An entry of 15 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +2500 mV.

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


Differential (DIFF) Channel

The analog channel where the sensor(s) has been wired.  On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the differential channel numbers are below the single-ended channel numbers.

When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

Example -- If REPS are 3 and the sensors are wired into channels 2 (2H & 2L), 3 (3H & 3L), and 4 (4H & 4L), the correct entry is 2.


Location

The input location which will store this instruction's first measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 3 -- Pulse

An Input/Output Instruction that counts high frequency, low level AC, and switch closure pulses.  This instruction's output depends on the configuration designated in parameter 3.

A 16-bit rather than 8-bit mode is also available for counting high frequency and low level AC pulses.  This instruction can also be used with control ports 6, 7, and 8.  However, when a control port is chosen for the input channel, the pulse type must be switch closure (<40 Hz).

Instruction 3 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Pulse Channel or Control Port

•	Parameter 3 -- Configuration

•	Parameter 4 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 5 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 6 -- Offset

Notes:

When using repetitions, control port 6 (C6) is not considered consecutive to pulse channel 2 (P2).

If more than one Instruction 3 is in your program, all of them must be placed in the same table.

Pulse Count Instructions that are in a subroutine must be called from Table 2.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.

Each measurement uses the same configuration, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.

Note:   Control port 6 (C6) is not considered consecutive to pulse channel 2 (P2).


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same configuration, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

Note:   Control port 6 (C6) is not considered consecutive to pulse channel 2 (P2).


Pulse Channel

Enter the channel (P1, P2, C6, C7, or C8) where the sensor has been wired.

Note:   The 16-bit counter option requires the sensor to be wired into pulse channel 1.

When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

Example:   If REPS are 2 and the sensors are wired into channels P1 and P2, the correct entry is 1.


Configuration

Record	 Discard

    all    	   bad	Output	 |

counts 	 Interval	Hertz	 |                        Pulse

   00	    10	   20	 |	High Frequency (index to change

 |	from 8 Hz to 64 Hz reset)

   01	    11	   21	 |	Low Level AC (index to change from

 |	 8 Hz to 64 Hz reset)

   02	    12	   22	 |	Switch Closure

   03	    13	   23	 |	High Frequency, 16-bit counter

   04	    14	   24	 |	Low Level AC, 16-bit counter

Notes:   The 16-bit counter options require the sensor to be wired into pulse channel 1.  When control ports (C6, C7, or C8) are chosen for the input channels, the pulse type must be switch closure (option 02, 12, or 22).

Example:    An entry of 11 selects a low level AC pulse type with the pulses discarded when they occur after the execution interval.

For more information, see Pulse Configuration Information.


Pulse Configuration Information

Pulse Types

High Frequency - pulses are incremented when the input voltage changes from below 1.5 volts to above 3.5 volts; anemometers produce high frequency pulses.

Low Level AC - the frequency of AC signals from magnetic pulse flow transducers or other low voltage, sine wave inputs are counted.

Switch Closure - the number of switch closures is counted; tipping bucket raingages are sensors with switch closures.

Notes:

High frequency and low level AC pulses can also be counted in a 16-bit rather than 8-bit mode.  The 16-bit counter has a higher maximum count rate (250 kHz whereas the 8-bit's is 2000 Hz).  The 16-bit counter option requires the sensor to be wired into pulse channel 1.

This instruction can also be used with control ports 6, 7, and 8.  However, when a control port is chosen for the input channel, the pulse type must be switch closure(<40 Hz).

Methods for Handling Excessive Intervals

Record All Counts - outputs the total number of pulses counted.  This option is required when pulse counts are totaled because missing counts can significantly affect the totaled value.

Discard Bad Intervals - outputs the number of pulses counted that occurred within the execution interval.  This option is used when the pulse count's processing is dependent on the sampling interval (e.g., speed, RPM).

Output Hertz - allows the use of a conversion factor that is independent of the execution interval.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the initial pulse measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 4 - Excite, Delay, Single-Ended

An Input/Output Instruction that applies an excitation voltage, delays for a specified amount of time, and then makes a single-ended voltage measurement.

Single-ended measurements measure the input's voltage with respect to ground; output is in millivolts.  The delay minimizes settling errors.

Instruction 8 is a similar instruction but is for differential measurements (see single-ended and differential comparison).

This measurement's resistance can also be calculated.

Instruction 4 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Single-Ended Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 5 -- Delay

•	Parameter 6 -- Excitation, mV

•	Parameter 7 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 8 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 9 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

Each measurement will use the same range, delay, excitation, multiplier, and offset.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement will use the same range, delay, excitation, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Range

 Integration Methods |

Slow 	Fast	| Full Scale Range

  00	  10	|	autorange

  01	  11	|	+   2.5 mV

  02	  12	|	+   7.5 mV

  03	  13	|	+  25 mV

  04	  14	|	+ 250 mV

  05	  15	|	+2500 mV

Example:   An entry of 15 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +2500 mV.

Note:  The 50 Hz and 60 Hz rejection is typically not used for this instruction because delays other than zero prevent the precise timing used for 50 Hz and 60 Hz rejection.  The delay is set in parameter 5.

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When repetitions are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel, see SE Chart.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When repetitions are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.


Excitation Channel Options

0x 	Excites all REPS with the same excitation channel.

1x	Increments the excitation channel with each REP.

Where x is the excitation channel.

Examples:

If the code is 01, all REPS will be excited with excitation channel E1.

If the code is 12 and there are 2 REPS, the first sensor will be excited with E2 and the second sensor will be excited with E3.


Delay, 0.01 seconds

Enter the number of seconds that the voltage measurement will be delayed.  This entry must be in increments of 0.01 seconds.


Excitation, mV

Enter the excitation voltage that will be applied.  A negative excitation voltage can be entered.


Location

Enter the input location that will store this instruction's first measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 5 -- AC Half Bridge

An Input/Output Instruction that applies an excitation voltage to a half bridge and makes a single-ended voltage measurement of the bridge output; single-ended measurements measure voltage with respect to ground.

The excitation voltage is then reversed and the measurement is repeated.  The final value is the difference between the two measurements ratioed to the excitation voltage.

Resistance can also be calculated.

Instruction 5 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Single-Ended Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 5 -- Excitation, mV

•	Parameter 6 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 7 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 8 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, excitation, multiplier, and offset.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, excitation, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Range

The slow integration is NOT used for AC half bridge measurements because of possible polarization errors.

  Integration Methods

--------------------------------

60 Hz	50 Hz	|	Full Scale

Fast 	  Rej 	  Rej	|	   Range

  10	   20	  30	|	autorange

  11	   21	  31	|	+   2.5 mV

  12	   22	  32	|	+   7.5 mV

  13	   23	  33	|	+  25 mV

  14	   24	  34	|	+ 250 mV

  15	   25	  35	|	+2500 mV

Example -- An entry of 15 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +2500 mV.

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When repetitions are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel, see SE Chart.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When repetitions are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.


Excitation Channel Options

0x 	Excites all REPS with the same excitation channel.

1x	Increments the excitation channel with each REP.

Where x is the excitation channel.

Examples:

If the code is 01, all REPS are excited with excitation channel E1.

If the code is 12 and there are 2 REPS, the first sensor is excited with E2 and the second sensor is excited with E3.


Excitation, mV

Enter the excitation voltage that will be applied.  A negative excitation voltage can be entered.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the initial AC half bridge measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 6 -- Full Bridge

An Input/Output Instruction that applies an excitation voltage to a full bridge and makes a differential voltage measurement of the bridge output; differential measurements measure the voltage between two inputs.

The measurement is made with both a positive and a negative excitation voltage polarity.  The result is 1000 times the bridge output ratio.

Resistance can also be calculated.

Instruction 6 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Differential Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 5 -- Excitation, mV

•	Parameter 6 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 7 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 8 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, excitation, multiplier, and offset.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, excitation, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Range

Integration Methods

-------------------------------------------

60 Hz	50 Hz	|	Full Scale

Slow 	Fast 	  Rej 	  Rej	|	   Range

  00	  10	   20	  30	|	autorange

  01	  11	   21	  31	|	+   2.5 mV

  02	  12	   22	  32	|	+   7.5 mV

  03	  13	   23	  33	|	+  25 mV

  04	  14	   24	  34	|	+ 250 mV

  05	  15	   25	  35	|	+2500 mV

Example -- An entry of 15 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +2500 mV.

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


Differential (DIFF) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor(s) has been wired.  On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the differential channel numbers are below the single-ended channel numbers.

When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

Example -- If REPS are 3 and the sensors are wired into channels 2 (2H & 2L), 3 (3H & 3L), and 4 (4H & 4L), the correct entry is 2.


Excitation Channel Options

0x 	Excites all REPS with the same excitation channel.

1x	Increments the excitation channel with each REP.

Where x is the excitation channel.

Examples:

If the code is 01, all REPS are excited with excitation channel E1.

If the code is 12 and there are 2 REPS, the first sensor is excited with E2 and the second sensor is excited with E3.


Excitation, mV

Enter the excitation voltage that will be applied.  A negative excitation voltage can be entered.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the initial full bridge measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 7 -- 3-Wire Half Bridge Measurement

An Input/Output Instruction that applies an excitation voltage and measures the voltage of the reference resistor and the sensor's sensing wire (the reference resistor and sensing wire are wired to adjacent single-ended channels).

The excitation voltage is then reversed and the measurements are repeated.

The two measurements are used to calculate the ratio of the voltage across the sensor to the voltage across the reference resistor.

Resistance can also be calculated.

Instruction 7 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Single-Ended Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 5 -- Excitation, mV

•	Parameter 6 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 7 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 8 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, excitation, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, excitation, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Range

Integration Methods

-------------------------------------------

60 Hz	50 Hz	|	Full Scale

Slow 	Fast 	  Rej 	  Rej	|	   Range

  00	  10	   20	  30	|	autorange

  01	  11	   21	  31	|	+   2.5 mV

  02	  12	   22	  32	|	+   7.5 mV

  03	  13	   23	  33	|	+  25 mV

  04	  14	   24	  34	|	+ 250 mV

  05	  15	   25	  35	|	+2500 mV

Example -- An entry of 15 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +2500 mV.

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel, see SE Chart.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.


Excitation Channel Options

0x 	Excites all REPS with the same excitation channel.

1x	Increments the excitation channel with each REP.

Where x is the excitation channel.

Examples:

If the code is 01, all REPS are excited with excitation channel E1.

If the code is 12 and there are 2 REPS, the first sensor is excited with E2 and the second sensor is excited with E3.


Excitation, mV

Enter the excitation voltage that will be applied.  A negative excitation voltage can be entered.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the initial 3-wire half bridge measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 8 -- Excite, Delay, Differential

An Input/Output Instruction that applies an excitation voltage, delays for a specified amount of time, and then makes a differential voltage measurement.

Differential measurements measure the voltage between two inputs; both inputs must be within the common mode range of +2.5 Volts.  The output is in millivolts.  The delay minimizes settling errors.

A similar instruction  is available for single-ended measurements (see comparison).  Resistance can also be calculated.

Instruction 8 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Differential Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 5 -- Delay

•	Parameter 6 -- Excitation, mV

•	Parameter 7 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 8 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 9 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, delay, excitation, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, delay, excitation, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Range

Integration Methods

 ------------------------------|	Full Scale

Slow 	Fast	|	   Range

  00	  10	|	autorange

  01	  11	|	+   2.5 mV

  02	  12	|	+   7.5 mV

  03	  13	|	+  25 mV

  04	  14	|	+ 250 mV

  05	  15	|	+2500 mV

Example -- An entry of 15 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +2500 mV.

Note --The 50 Hz and 60 Hz rejection is not allowed for this instruction because this instruction adds delay which prevents the precise timing used for 50 Hz and 60 Hz rejection.

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


Differential (DIFF) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor(s) has been wired.  On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the differential channel numbers are below the single-ended channel numbers.

When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

Example -- If REPS are 3 and the sensors are wired into channels 2 (2H & 2L), 3 (3H & 3L), and 4 (4H & 4L), the correct entry is 2.


Excitation Channel Options

0x 	Excites all repetitions with the same excitation channel.

1x	Increments the excitation channel with each repetition.

Where x is the excitation channel.

Examples:

If the code is 01, all repetitions are excited with excitation channel E1.

If the code is 12 and there are 2 repetitions, the first sensor is excited with E2 and the second sensor is excited with E3.


Delay, 0.01 seconds

Enter the number of seconds that the voltage measurement will be delayed.  This entry must be in increments of 0.01 seconds.


Excitation, mV

Enter the excitation voltage that will be applied.  A negative excitation voltage can be entered.


Location

Enter the input location that will store this instruction's first measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Inst. 9 - Full Bridge w/Excit. Compensation

An Input/Output Instruction that applies an excitation voltage and makes two differential measurements (wired in consecutive channels).

Differential measurements measure the voltage between two inputs; both inputs must be within the common mode range of +2.5 Volts.  The measurements are made with both positive and negative excitation voltage.

The result is the voltage measured on the second channel divided by the voltage measured on the first.  The specific units depend on the voltage ranges chosen.  If code 5, 15, 25, or 35 is chosen for parameter 2, the result is millivolts output per volt excitation.  Otherwise, the result is millivolts output per millivolt excitation.

This instruction can be used to make either full bridge or half bridge measurements.  Resistance for both full bridge and half bridge  measurements can be calculated.

Instruction 9 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Excitation Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Bridge Range

•	Parameter 4 -- Differential Channel

•	Parameter 5 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 6 -- Excitation, mV

•	Parameter 7 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 8 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 9 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same excitation range, bridge range, excitation, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same excitation range, bridge range, excitation, multiplier, and offset.

The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Excitation Range

Integration Methods

-------------------------------------------

60 Hz	50 Hz	|	Full Scale

Slow 	Fast 	  Rej 	  Rej	|	   Range

  00	  10	   20	  30	|	autorange

  01	  11	   21	  31	|	+   2.5 mV

  02	  12	   22	  32	|	+   7.5 mV

  03	  13	   23	  33	|	+  25 mV

  04	  14	   24	  34	|	+ 250 mV

  05	  15	   25	  35	|	+2500 mV

Example -- An entry of 15 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +2500 mV.

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


Bridge Range

Integration Methods

-------------------------------------------

60 Hz	50 Hz	|	Full Scale

Slow 	Fast 	  Rej 	  Rej	|	   Range

  00	  10	   20	  30	|	autorange

  01	  11	   21	  31	|	+   2.5 mV

  02	  12	   22	  32	|	+   7.5 mV

  03	  13	   23	  33	|	+  25 mV

  04	  14	   24	  34	|	+ 250 mV

  05	  15	   25	  35	|	+2500 mV

Example -- An entry of 15 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +2500 mV.

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


Differential (DIFF) Channel

Because this instruction makes two differential measurements, each sensor should be wired into two consecutive differential channels.  This parameter's entry is the first differential channel where the sensor has been wired.

When REPS are greater than 1, enter the first differential channel of the first sensor.


Excitation Channel Options

0x 	Excites all repetitions with the same excitation channel.

1x	Increments the excitation channel with each repetition.

Where x is the excitation channel.

Examples:

If the code is 01, all repetitions are excited with excitation channel E1.

If the code is 12 and there are 2 repetitions, the first sensor is excited with E2 and the second sensor is excited with E3.


Excitation, mV

Enter the excitation voltage that will be applied.  A negative excitation voltage can be entered.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the first full bridge measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 10 - Battery Voltage

An Input/Output instruction that measures the datalogger's battery voltage (in volts) and places this measurement in an input location (parameter 1).

This instruction allows you to monitor the battery's performance.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the battery's voltage.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 11 -- Temperature (107/107B)

An Input/Output Instruction that measures the 107 and 107B thermistors.  Output is in degree Celsius.

Instruction 11 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Single-Ended Channel

•	Parameter 3 -- Excitation/Integration Code

•	Parameter 4 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 5 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 6 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same Multiplier and Offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same multiplier and offset.

The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry will be the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel, see SE Chart.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry will be the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.


Excitation/Integration Codes

Code	Result

  0x 	Excite all REPS with excitation channel x.

  1x	Increment excitation channel x with each REP.

  2x	Excite all REPs with channel x, 60 Hz rejection, 10 ms delay.

  3x	Excite all REPs with channel x, 50 Hz rejection, 10 ms delay.

  4x	Increment excitation channel x with each REP, 60 Hz rejection, 10 ms delay.

  5x	Increment excitation channel x with each REP, 50 Hz rejection, 10 ms delay.

Examples:

If the code is 01, all REPS are excited with excitation channel E1.

If the code is 12 and there are 2 REPS, the first sensor is excited with E2 and the second sensor is excited with E3.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the first temperature measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 12 -- Relative Humidity (207)

An Input/Output Instruction that measures relative humidity with the 207 probe.  The output is in percent RH.

Instruction 12 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Single-Ended Channel

•	Parameter 3 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Temperature Location

•	Parameter 5 -- R.H. Location

•	Parameter 6 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 7 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same multiplier and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same multiplier and offset.

The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel, see SE Chart.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.


Excitation Channel Options

0x 	Excites all REPS with the same excitation channel.

1x	Increments the excitation channel with each REP.

Where x is the excitation channel.

Examples:

If the code is 01, all REPS are excited with excitation channel E1.

If the code is 12 and there are 2 REPS, the first sensor is excited with E2 and the second sensor is excited with E3.


Temperature Location

Enter the input location that holds the reference temperature measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Relative Humidity Location

Enter the input location that will store the first relative humidity measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Inst. 13 -- Thermocouple Temperature (SE)

An Input/Output Instruction  that makes a single-ended thermocouple measurement.

Single-ended measurements measure the input's voltage with respect to ground; output is in degrees Celsius.

A similar instruction is available for differential measurements (see comparison).

Note:   The thermocouple type and the temperature range being measured determine the voltage's full scale range that should be used (see Voltage/Temperature Chart).

Instruction 13 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Single-Ended Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Thermocouple Type

•	Parameter 5 -- Reference Location

•	Parameter 6 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 7 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 8 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, thermocouple type, reference location, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, thermocouple type, reference location, multiplier, and offset.

The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Range

The +2500 mV full scale range is not recommended for thermocouple measurements.

Integration Methods

-------------------------------------------

60 Hz	50 Hz	|	Full Scale

Slow 	Fast 	  Rej 	  Rej	|	   Range

  00	  10	   20	  30	|	autorange

  01	  11	   21	  31	|	+   2.5 mV

  02	  12	   22	  32	|	+   7.5 mV

  03	  13	   23	  33	|	+  25 mV

  04	  14	   24	  34	|	+ 250 mV

Example -- An entry of 14 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +250 mV.

Note:   The thermocouple type and the temperature range being measured determine the voltage's full scale range that should be used (see Voltage/Temperature Chart).

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


TC Voltage/Temperature Chart

The following temperature ranges assume the reference temperature is 20 degrees Celsius:

|    Temp. Ranges (deg C) for TC Types T, E, K, & J

  FSR  |-------------------------------------------------------------------------

  (mV) |    Type T    	   Type E     	    Type K    	    Type J

+    2.5| -46 to 78    	 -21 to 60    	 -44 to 80    	 -29 to 67

+    7.5| -270 to 181  	-124 to 134   	-270 to 203   	-149 to 159

+  25	| -270 to 400  	-270 to 365   	-270 to 620   	-210 to 475

+250	|  see Note  	-270 to 1000  	-270 to 1372  	-210 to 760

|    Temp. Ranges (deg C) for TC Types B, R, S, & N

  FSR  |-------------------------------------------------------------------------

  (mV) |    Type B    	   Type R     	    Type S    	    Type N

+    2.5|   0 to 709	   0 to 158	  -50 to 331	   -80 to 108

+    7.5|   0 to 1267	   0 to 772	  -50 to 824	 -200 to 262

+  25	|   0 to 1700	   0 to 1450	  -50 to 1450	 -200 to 725

+250	|  see Note  	  see Note	  see Note	 -200 to 1300

Note:   The +250 mV full scale range is not recommended for measuring types T, B, R, and S.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When indexed, this entry becomes an input location containing a voltage measurement.  For information about indexing parameters, see Indexing Parameters.

When REPS are greater than 1 and the entry is not indexed, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel, see SE Chart.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When indexed, this entry becomes an input location containing a voltage measurement.

When REPS are greater than 1 and the entry is not indexed, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.


Thermocouple Types

Code 	Type

  1	T (copper-constantan)

  2 	E (chromel-constantan)

  3	K (chromel-alumel)

  4	J (iron-constantan)

  5	B (platinum-rhodium)

  6	R (platinum-rhodium)

  7	S (platinum-rhodium)

  8	N (nickel - chromium)

 1X	Output temperature difference between reference and thermocouple; X is one of the above thermocouple types.

 8X	TC input from A5B40 Isolation Amplifier (use +2500 mV range); X is one of the above thermocouple types.

Note:   The thermocouple type and the temperature range being measured determine the voltage's full scale range that should be used (see Voltage/Temperature Chart).


Reference Temperature Location

Enter the input location that holds the reference temperature.

Note:  The reference temperature must be measured in degree Celsius.

For more information about input locations, see Input Location Information.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the initial thermocouple measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Inst. 14 -- Thermocouple Temperature (DIFF)

An Input/Output Instruction that makes a differential thermocouple measurement.

Differential measurements measure the voltage between two inputs; both inputs must be within the common mode range of +2.5 Volts.  The output is in degrees Celsius.

A similar instruction is available for single-ended measurements (see comparison).

Note:   The thermocouple type and the temperature range being measured determine the voltage's full scale range that should be used (see Voltage/Temperature Chart).

Instruction 14 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Differential Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Thermocouple Type

•	Parameter 5 -- Reference Location

•	Parameter 6 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 7 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 8 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, thermocouple type, reference location, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same range, thermocouple type, reference location, multiplier, and offset.

The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Range

The +2500 mV full scale range is not recommended for thermocouple measurements.

Integration Methods

-------------------------------------------

60 Hz	50 Hz	|	Full Scale

Slow 	Fast 	  Rej 	  Rej	|	   Range

  00	  10	   20	  30	|	autorange

  01	  11	   21	  31	|	+   2.5 mV

  02	  12	   22	  32	|	+   7.5 mV

  03	  13	   23	  33	|	+  25 mV

  04	  14	   24	  34	|	+ 250 mV

Example -- An entry of 14 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +250 mV.

Note:   The thermocouple type and the temperature range being measured determine the voltage's full scale range that should be used (see Voltage/Temperature Chart).

For more information, see Integration Methods and Autorange Description.


Differential (DIFF) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor(s) has been wired.  When indexed, this entry becomes an input location containing a voltage measurement.  For information about indexing parameters, see Indexing Parameters.

When REPS are greater than 1 and the entry is not indexed, this entry is the first sensor's channel.  On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the differential channel numbers are below the single-ended channel numbers.

Example -- If REPS are 3 and the sensors are wired into channels 2 (2H & 2L), 3 (3H & 3L), and 4 (4H & 4L), the correct entry is 2.


Differential (DIFF) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor(s) has been wired.  When indexed, this entry becomes an input location containing a voltage measurement.

When REPS are greater than 1 and the entry is not indexed, this entry is the first sensor's channel.  On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the differential channel numbers are below the single-ended channel numbers.

Example:   If REPS are 3 and the sensors are wired into channels 2 (2H & 2L), 3 (3H & 3L), and 4 (4H & 4L), the correct entry is 2.


Thermocouple Types

Code 	Type

  1	T (copper - constantan)

  2 	E (chromel - constantan)

  3	K (chromel - alumel)

  4	J (iron - constantan)

  5	B (platinum - rhodium)

  6	R (platinum - rhodium)

  7	S (platinum - rhodium)

  8	N (nickel - chromium)

 1X	Output temperature difference between reference and thermocouple; X is one of the above thermocouple types.

 8X	TC input from A5B40 Isolation Amplifier (use +2500 mV range); X is one of the above thermocouple types.

 9X	Outputs -99999 when the common mode range is exceeded; X is one of the above thermocouple types.

Note:   The thermocouple type and the temperature range being measured determine the voltage's full scale range that should be used (see Voltage/Temperature Chart).


Reference Temperature Location

Enter the input location that holds the reference temperature.

Note:  The reference temperature must be measured in degree Celsius.

For more information about input locations, see Input Location Information.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the initial thermocouple measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 15 -- Control Port Serial I/O

An Input/Output Instruction that sends and receives full-duplex data through the datalogger's control ports. Received serial data can be buffered.  This prevents data from being lost from sensors that output data without hardware or software command prompting from the datalogger.

Note:  If the received data is numeric values, Instruction 15 converts a maximum of seven digits in a row.  Leading zeros will be counted as part of the seven digits; e.g., 0000010.1223 will be read as 10.

Applying Filters

Received data can also have simple ASCII filters applied to locate the beginning of the actual data set.  Multiple filters can be applied if the data are imbedded in a long string.  Applying filters can be especially useful when reading data from serial sensors such as Global Positioning Receivers (GPS).

To apply filters to the incoming data string, follow this instruction with Instruction 63 or Instruction 68.  Instruction 63 or 68 is used to enter the ASCII characters for the values you want to use as a filter; separate filters by a zero.  The received data that follows the first character string will be stored in the input location designated in parameter 10; the data that follows the second character string will be stored in the next consecutive input location, etc.  If the character string does not appear in the received data, -99999 will be stored in the input location.  For more information, see Filter Example.

Instruction 15 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Configuration Code

•	Parameter 3 -- CTS/Delay before send

•	Parameter 4 -- Control Port

•	Parameter 5 -- Output Start Location

•	Parameter 6 -- Number of Locations to Send

•	Parameter 7 -- Input Termination Character

•	Parameter 8 -- Maximum Number of Input Characters

•	Parameter 9 -- Time Out

•	Parameter 10 -- Input Start Location

•	Parameter 11 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 12 -- Offset

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be read with this instruction.  Each sensor uses the same configuration and, when applicable, the same output start location.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

The datalogger sequentially increments sets of control ports and input locations with each repetition.  The number of control ports used for each repetition (2, 3, or 4) depends on whether data are to be output and/or input, and the number of lines used to control the timing.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be read with this instruction.  Each sensor uses the same configuration and, when applicable, the same starting output location.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

The datalogger sequentially increments sets of control ports and input locations with each repetition.  The number of control ports used for each repetition (2, 3, or 4) depends on whether data are to be output and/or input, and the number of lines used to control the timing.


Configuration Code

       Input Formats

 ----------------------------------------------------

  ASCII  	|   Logic Level/

ASCII	Hex pair	Binary	|    Baud Rate

   00	     10	   20	| TTL, 1200 baud

   01	     11	   21	| RS-232, 1200 baud

   02	     12	   22	| TTL, 300 baud

   03	     13	   23	| RS232, 300 baud

Example:   An entry of 03 specifies the ASCII input format, RS-232 logic, and a 300 baud rate.

For more information, see Configuration Codes Description.


Configuration Codes Description

Input Formats

ASCII -- datalogger receives and decodes an ASCII string of numbers into one or more data values.  Data are assumed to consist of an optional sign (+ or -) followed by digits and an optional decimal point.  Any other character that is not the termination character is assumed to be a delimiter between data values.  Any digits before a + or - are discarded.  For an example, see ASCII Example.

Hexadecimal Pairs in ASCII Representation -- decodes ASCII representation of hexadecimal code into decimal values.  The value from each pair is stored in separate input locations starting with the location specified in parameter 10.  For an example, see Hexadecimal Pairs Example.

Binary to Decimal Equivalent -- receives and converts each 8-bit byte to its decimal equivalent (0 to 255).  For an example, see Binary to Decimal Equivalent Example.

For information on parity and stop bits, see parity and stop bits.

Logic Levels

TTL -- logical 1 is high voltage and 0 is low voltage.

RS-232 -- logical 1 is low voltage and 0 is high voltage.


ASCII Example

The input string:

 -123.456, + 1000,0000,2333,.0001*

is converted to:

 -123.456, 1000.0, 0.0, 2333.0, and 0.0001

then -123.456 is stored in the input location specified in parameter 10.  The remaining values are stored in the next consecutive locations.  The termination character is * (ASCII equivalent 42).


Hexadecimal Pairs in ASCII Representation Example

The input string:

 7F7E0A0B0C1E<cr><If>

is translated into:

 127, 126, 10, 11, 12, 30

The 7F is equal to 7*16+15 = 112+15=127.

Any character with a decimal value below 48 (ASCII character 0) terminates the string.  <cr> terminates the string in this example.


Binary to Decimal Equivalent Example

The ASCII input string:

 7F7E0A0B0C1E<cr><If>

is translated into:

55, 70, 55, 69, 48, 65, 48, 66, 48, 67, 49, 69, 13, 10

and stored in consecutive input locations.


Parity and Stop Bits

Receive

ASCII and Hexadecimal Pairs in ASCII Representation:

1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, 8th bit ignored

Binary to Decimal Equivalent:

1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit

Transmit

1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit


CTS/Delay Before Send

Zero entry

The datalogger will wait for the Clear-To-Send (CTS) to become high before sending output.  If CTS doesn't go high within the specified time, -99999 will be placed an input location and data will not be output.

Non-zero entry

The length of time (entered in 0.01 sec.) between asserting the Request-To-Send and sending output.


First Control Port

Enter the first control port that will be used by the first repetition.  This is always the RTS/DTR line.


Output Start Location

Enter the first input location that will store the first value that has been sent from the datalogger.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Number of Locations to Send

Enter the number of input locations whose values will be sent from the datalogger; enter a 0 to send nothing.

The values stored in these input locations are assumed to be in ASCII decimal equivalent code.  To have the datalogger convert the values to ASCII, index this entry by pressing the F4 function key after entering this parameter.

Typically, this entry is not indexed when the input locations hold a preamble or command characters to a sensor.  This entry is typically indexed when outputting data from the CR10X's input locations to another CR10X.


Number of Locations to Send

Enter the number of input locations whose values will be sent from the datalogger; enter a 0 to send nothing.

The values stored in these input locations are assumed to be in ASCII decimal equivalent code.  To have the datalogger convert the values to ASCII, index this entry by pressing the F4 function key after entering this parameter.

Typically, this entry is not indexed when the input locations hold a preamble or command characters.  This entry is typically indexed when outputting data to another CR10X.


Sending a Preamble to a Sensor

The preamble is stored in consecutive input locations with one ASCII decimal equivalent code (0 to 127) in each location.

Negative values indicate a "BREAK" should be sent.  A "BREAK" is a spacing condition of more than 150 ms (see parity and stop bits information).


Outputting Data to Another CR10X

Seven ASCII characters are sent for each input location (+ or -, five digits, and a decimal point).

Data points are separated by a space and the string is terminated with a Carriage Return and Line Feed (see parity and stop bits information).


Input Termination Character

Enter the decimal equivalent for the character that marks the end of the ASCII string received by the datalogger (see Decimal characters).

Note:   Regardless of the configuration code, all 8 bits are used to determine the termination character.  Thus, if the sensor is sending parity, you may need to add 128 to the decimal value of the character.


Input Termination Character

Enter the decimal equivalent for the character that marks the end of the ASCII string received by the datalogger.

Note:   Regardless of the configuration code, all 8 bits are used to determine the termination character.  Thus, if the sensor is sending parity, you may need to add 128 to the decimal value of the character.


Maximum Number of Characters to Receive

Enter the total number of characters to expect per input; enter a 0 if input is not expected.

Note:   This includes numeric, non-numeric, polarity, decimal, space, and carriage return characters.  When the specified number of characters have been received, any additional characters are discarded.


Time Out (0.01 sec)

Specify the number of seconds the datalogger will wait before advancing to the next repetition or instruction.  The time out specifies one of the following:

•	The amount of time to wait for the clear-to-send port to go high (see CTS Time-Out)

•	The amount of time to wait for serial input (see Input, Time-Out)

•	Both of the above

Note:   The maximum time-out is 99.99 seconds.  If a longer delay is required, enter a -1.  This causes the program's execution to advance to the next instruction when the datalogger has received the input termination character or the maximum number of characters.


Time Out (0.01 sec)

Specify the number of seconds the datalogger will wait before advancing to the next repetition or instruction.

Note:   The maximum time-out is 99.99 seconds.  If a longer delay is required, enter a -1.  This causes the program's execution to advance to the next instruction when the datalogger has received the input termination character or the maximum number of characters.


Time-Out for Clear-To-Send (CTS)

The amount of time the datalogger will wait for the CTS port to go high (parameter 3 = 3 and parameter 6 > 0) before advancing to the next instruction.

If the delay lapses, no data are output and -99999 is stored in the input location specified by parameter 10.

If output is completed before the end of the delay, program execution immediately advances to the next instruction.


Time-Out for Serial Input

The amount of time the datalogger will wait for serial input (parameter 8 > 0) before advancing to the next instruction.

If the delay lapses and some characters have been received, the time-out acts like a termination character.  If no characters have been received, a -99999 is stored indicating communication problems.  If input is completed before the end of the delay, program execution immediately advances to the next instruction.


Input Location

Enter the input location which will store the first value that has been received from the sensor.  Multiple data values will be stored in consecutive locations.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 16 - RTD Temperature

A Processing Instruction that converts the resistance of a Platinum Resistance Thermometer (PRT) to temperature.  If a multiplier of 1 and an offset of 0 are used, the output is in degrees Celsius.

The input to the temperature calculation is the ratio of the PRT resistance at the temperature being measured (Rs) to its resistance at 0 degrees C (Ro).  A bridge measurement (Instruction 6  with Instruction 59, Instruction 7, or Instruction 9) is used to measure the PRT in a bridge and to calculate the ratio, Rs/Ro.

Instruction 16 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- R/R0 Location

•	Parameter 3 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 4 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 5 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same R/R0 ratio, multiplier, and offset.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

For more information, see Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  Each measurement uses the same R/R0 location, multiplier, and offset.

The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


R/R0 Location

Enter the input location that holds the R/R0 ratio.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the first temperature measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 17 - Internal Temperature

An Input/Output Instruction that measures the CR10X's internal temperature in degrees Celsius and places the temperature in an input location (parameter 1).

This instruction may not be suitable for the reference thermocouple temperature in Instruction 13 and Instruction 14.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the internal temperature measurement.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 18 - Time

An Input/Output Instruction that divides the current time by a number specified in parameter 2 and stores the remainder.

The actual time can be stored by entering, for parameter 2, a 0 or a number greater than the maximum.

Instruction 18 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Option Codes

•	Parameter 2 -- Mod/By

•	Parameter 3 -- Input Location


Option Codes Description
Option Codes

0	seconds into minute (max 59)

1	minutes into day (max 1439)

2	hours into year (max 8784 on leap year, 8760 otherwise)

3	store year, day, hour, minutes, seconds in 5 consecutive locations (modulo divide not used).


Mod/By

Enter the number that the current time will be modulo divided by; enter zero to store the current time.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the time.

If code 3 is chosen for parameter 1, this location will store the year; consecutive locations will store the day, hour, minute, and second.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 19 - Signature

An Input/Output Instruction that stores the signature of the ROM and RAM in an input location (parameter 1).

This instruction allows the user to detect program changes or ROM failure.

The signature is determined by the CR10X PROM, the size of RAM, and the entries in the *1, *2, *3, *A, and *C modes.

Note:   This is not the *B mode's signature.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the signature.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 20 - Set Port

An Input/Output Instruction that sets or configures the control ports (C1 - C8).

Instruction 20 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Configure Ports 8, 7, 6, & 5

•	Parameter 2 -- Configure Ports 4, 3, 2, & 1


Configure ports 8, 7, 6, & 5

Enter a four digit parameter; each digit configures the respective port.  Options 3 through 6 are for the duration on subsequent pulse ports.

 0	Set low

 1	Set high

 2	Toggle

 3	1 ms duration

 4	10 ms duration

 5	100 ms duration

 6	1 s duration

 7 	Configure as output

 8	Configure as input

 9	No change

Example:   7702 configures C8 and C7 as outputs, sets C6 low, and toggles C5.


Configure ports 4, 3, 2, & 1

Enter a four digit parameter; each digit configures the respective port.  Options 3 through 6 are for the duration on subsequent pulse ports.

 0	Set low

 1	Set high

 2	Toggle

 3	1 ms duration

 4	10 ms duration

 5	100 ms duration

 6	1 s duration

 7 	Configure as output

 8	Configure as input

 9	No change

Example:   7702 configures C4 and C3 as outputs, sets C2 low, and toggles C1.


Instruction 21 - Pulse Port with Duration

An Input/Output Instruction that pulses a control port for a specified amount of time in hundredths of seconds.

The pulse works as a toggle (e.g., if the port is high before the instruction is executed, it will pulse low).

Any value less than 1, including 0, gives a pulse of 10 milliseconds.  The maximum input value is limited to 65,000 which gives a pulse length of 650 seconds.

Instruction 21 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Control Port

•	Parameter 2 -- Input Location


Control Port

Enter the number of the port that will be pulsed.


Input Location

Enter the input location that holds the pulse length.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 22 - Excitation with Delay

An Input/Output Instruction that is used with other instructions to measure a response to a timed excitation.

This instruction turns on the excitation for a specified amount of time; after the excitation is turned off, the program is delayed a specified amount of time.

Instruction 22 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 2 -- Delay with Excitation

•	Parameter 3 -- Delay after Excitation

•	Parameter 4 -- Excitation or Input Location


Excitation Channel

Enter the excitation channel (E1 - E3) where the sensor has been wired.

When this entry is indexed, parameter 4 becomes an input location.  For information about indexing parameters, see Indexing Parameters.


Excitation Channel

Enter the excitation channel (E1 - E3) where the sensor has been wired.

When this entry is indexed, parameter 4 becomes an input location.


Delay with Excitation

Enter the amount of time that the excitation will be applied.

This entry must be greater than 0 and entered in increments of 0.01 seconds.


Delay after Excitation

Enter the amount of time the program will be delayed after the excitation has been turned off.

This entry must be greater than 0 and entered in increments of 0.01 seconds.


Excitation or Input Location

Excitation (mV) -- enter the excitation voltage in millivolts.  Index this entry for a negative voltage.  For information about indexing parameters, see Indexing Parameters.

Input Location -- if parameter 1 has been indexed, enter the input location that holds the excitation voltage.  For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Excitation or Input Location

Excitation (mV) -- enter the excitation voltage in millivolts.  Index this entry for a negative voltage.

Input Location -- if parameter 1 has been indexed, enter the input location that holds the excitation voltage.


Instruction 23 - Burst Mode

An Input/Output Instruction that repeatedly measures voltage on a series of single-ended or differential channels and when specified applies excitation.

The minimum time for each measurement is 1.333 ms (e.g., one channel can be sampled at a rate of 750 Hz, max).  This means that the time per scan (parameter 5) must be greater than the number of reps. multiplied by 1.333 ms.

The results of the measurements are in millivolts prior to being scaled and can either be stored in an input location or are sent to the serial port.

Instruction 23 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Input Channels per Scan

•	Parameter 2 -- Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Input Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Trig/Trig/Dest/Meas. Options

•	Parameter 5 -- Time per Scans (ms)

•	Parameter 6 -- Scans (1000)

•	Parameter 7 -- Samples before Trigger

•	Parameter 8 -- mV Limit

•	Parameter 9 -- mV Excitation

•	Parameter 10 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 11 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 12 -- Offset

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Input Channels per Scan

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.

Each measurement uses the same range, option, scan interval, number of scans, trigger offset, trigger limit, excitation, multiplier, and offset.

The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Input Channels per Scan

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.

Each measurement uses the same range, option, scan interval, number of scans, trigger offset, trigger limit, excitation, multiplier, and offset.

The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.


Range

  Integration Methods	Full Scale

Fast (250 microsecond)	   Range

   11	+   2.5 mV

   12	+   7.5 mV

   13	+  25 mV

   14	+ 250 mV

   15	+2500 mV

Example -- An entry of 15 selects the fast integration and a full scale range of +2500 mV.


Input Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor(s) has been wired.  When more than 1 sensor is measured, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel and making single-ended measurements, see SE Chart.


Input Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor(s) has been wired.  When more than 1 sensor is measured, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X wiring panel, single-ended channels have blue numbers; differential have white.


Trigger/Trigger/Destination/Measurement Options

ABCD

A   Trigger

      0 -- Trigger on first channel

      1 -- Digital trigger on C1

      2 -- Same as 0, but sets C1 high on trigger

 B   Trigger Option

       0 -- Trigger immediately

       1 -- Trigger if above limit (high)

       2 -- Trigger if below limit (low)

       3 -- Trigger on rising edge

       4 -- Trigger on falling edge

  C   Destination

        0 -- Input Storage

        1 -- Serial port, 9600 baud

        2 -- Serial port, 76800 baud

        3 -- Serial port, 76800 baud to SM192 or SM716 storage module

    D   Measurement

         0 -- Differential

         1 -- Single-Ended

Example:

The entry 1430 does the following:    1 sets the digital trigger on C1; 4 causes it to trigger on the falling edge; 3 causes the data to be sent through a serial port to a storage module; 0 designates a differential measurement.


Trigger/Trigger/Destination/Measurements Options

ABCD

A   Trigger

      0 -- Trigger on first channel

      1 -- Digital trigger on C1

      2 -- Same as 0, but sets C1 high on trigger.

 B   Trigger Option

       0 -- Trigger immediately

       1 -- Trigger if above limit (high)

       2 -- Trigger if below limit (low)

       3 -- Trigger on rising edge

       4 -- Trigger on falling edge

  C   Destination

        0 -- Input Storage

        1 -- Serial port, 9600 baud

        2 -- Serial port, 76800 baud

        3 -- Serial port, 76800 baud to SM192 or SM716 storage module.

    D   Measurement

         0 -- Differential

         1 -- Single-Ended

Example:

The entry 1430 does the following:    1 sets the digital trigger on C1; 4 causes it to trigger on the falling edge; 3 causes the data to be sent through a serial port to a storage module; 0 designates a differential measurement.


Time per Scans (ms)

Enter the time between the scan of each channel.  This scan is independent of the execution interval.

Note:   The minimum time for each measurement is 1.333 ms which means the minimum entry must be greater than the number of reps multiplied by 1.333 ms.  Otherwise an error occurs.  The maximum time allowed per measurement is 50 ms.  When sending data to the serial port, the maximum scan rate may be reduced.


Scans (1000)

Enter the number of scans which will determine the number of samples saved.


Samples before Trigger

Enter the number of samples that will be saved prior to the trigger.


mV limit

Enter the limit used for trigger options 1 and 2 in parameter 4.


mV Limit

Enter the limit used for trigger options 1 and 2 in parameter 4.


mV Excitation

Enter the excitation voltage that will be applied.  The excitation is always supplied from Excitation channel 1.

A negative excitation voltage can be entered.  If excitation is not required, enter a 0.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the first burst mode measurement.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 24 - Calibration

An Input/Output Instruction that implements a complete calibration when this instruction occurs in the program.

The calibration will be stored in 19 consecutive input locations.  The first input location is designated in parameter 1.

Note:    The automatic calibration is disabled (see comparison of Instruction 24 and automatic calibration).  By pressing the F4 function key when entering parameter 1's first entry, the automatic calibration is not disabled and the automatic calibration results are stored in the input locations.  If -99999 appears in any of the locations, the CR10X has a hardware problem or requires factory calibration.


Instruction 24 versus Automatic Calibration

Instruction 24's calibration takes approximately 2.8 seconds to complete, whereas the automatic calibration has a 15 minute time constant.

Instruction 24's calibration is advantageous over automatic calibrations for applications where:

•	The CR10X is exposed to extreme temperature gradients.

•	Automatic calibration interferes with the sampling rate, and the ambient temperature is stable enough to allow calibration at specific points during program execution.


Location

Enter the first input location for the calibration values; 19 consecutive locations are used.

To store the automatic calibration values, press the F4 function key before entering the location number.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 25 - Read Ports

An Input/Output Instruction that reads the status of a group of ports and places the status in an input location (parameter 2).

The mask (parameter 1) designates the group of ports that are read.

The number stored in the input location is the sum of the values of the ports that are set high.  For the status reading, the ports have the following values:

PORT  	VALUE

  C8	  128

  C7	   64

  C6	   32

  C5	   16

  C4	     8

  C3	     4

  C2	     2

  C1	     1

Examples:

The following examples assume all ports are read (i.e., a mask value of 255):

•	When ports C7, C5, C4, and C3 are the only ports set high, 92 (64 + 16 + 8 + 4 = 92) is stored.

•	When only C7 and C3 are set high, 68 (64 + 4 = 68) is stored.

•	When no ports are set high, 0 is stored.


Mask

Enter the sum of the values that correspond to the desired ports:

PORT  	VALUE

  C8	  128

  C7	   64

  C6	   32

  C5	   16

  C4	     8

  C3	     4

  C2	     2

  C1	     1

Examples:

•	To select all ports, the mask entry is 255 (128 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 255).

•	To select ports C7, C6, and C3, the entry is 100 (64 + 32 + 4 = 100).

•	To select ports C3 and C1, the entry is 5 (4 + 1 = 5).


Location

Enter the input location that will store the status of the ports.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 26 - Timer

An Input/Output Instruction that measures the number of seconds that has elapsed since the specified conditions have occurred.

The time will be stored in an input location (parameter 1).

Note:   This instruction resets the timer when a 0 is entered for parameter 1.  Time is tracked in 0.125 second increments.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the time in seconds; the timer is reset by entering a zero.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 27 - Period Average, SE

An Input/Output Instruction that measures a time period for a specified number of cycles of an input frequency, then divides the time period by the number of cycles, obtaining the average period of a single cycle.

The output units can either be microseconds or kHz.  This is a single-ended measurement.

Instruction 27 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Option/Range

•	Parameter 3 -- Single-Ended Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Number of Cycles

•	Parameter 5 -- Time-Out (0.01 sec)

•	Parameter 6 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 7 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 8 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

Each measurement uses the same option/range, number of cycles, time-out, multiplier, and offset.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

Each measurement uses the same option/range, number of cycles, time-out, multiplier, and offset.


Option/Range

Code	Max. Freq.

  x1	8 kHz @ 2 mV peak-to-peak

  x2	20 kHz @ 3 mV peak-to-peak

  x3	50 kHz @ 12 mV peak-to-peak

  x4	200 kHz @ 2 V peak-to-peak

 Where:	x = 0   Output period in microseconds

x = 1   Output frequency in kHz


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel, see SE Chart.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.


Number of Cycles

Enter the number of cycles that will be measured.


Time Out

Enter the maximum length of time (in units of 0.01 sec.) the instruction will wait for the specified number of cycles.

This entry should be at least the maximum duration of the number of cycles specified + 1 1/2 cycles.  If the specified number of cycles has not occurred within this time period, the input location will store -99999.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the first period average.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 28 - Vibrating Wire, SE

An Input/Output Instruction that excites a vibrating wire sensor with a swept frequency (from low to high), then measures the period of the response and calculates 1/T^2, where T is the period in ms.

An AVW1 or AVW4 Vibrating Wire Interface is usually required with these sensors.

Instruction 28 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Single-Ended Channel

•	Parameter 3 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Start Frequency

•	Parameter 5 -- End Frequency

•	Parameter 6 -- Number of Cycles

•	Parameter 7 -- Delay, 0.01 sec.

•	Parameter 8 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 9 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 10 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

By pressing the F4 function before entering the REPS value, the excitation is only applied to the first REP.  Otherwise, each REP uses the same excitation.  Each measurement also uses the same starting frequency, ending frequency, number of cycles, delay, multiplier, and offset.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

By pressing the F4 function before entering the REPS value, the excitation is only applied to the first REP.  Otherwise, each REP uses the same excitation.  Each measurement also uses the same starting frequency, ending frequency, number of cycles, delay, multiplier, and offset.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel, see SE Chart.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.


Excitation Channel Options

0x 	Excites all REPS with the same excitation channel.

1x	Increments the excitation channel with each REP.

Where x is the excitation channel.

Examples:

If the code is 01, all REPS are excited with excitation channel E1.

If the code is 12 and there are 2 REPS, the first sensor is excited with E2 and the second sensor is excited with E3.


Starting Frequency

Enter in hundreds of Hz the lowest frequency of the sweep.


Ending Frequency

Enter in hundreds of Hz the highest frequency of the sweep.


Number of Cycles

Enter the number of cycles that will be measured.  An entry of 0 measures no cycles.


Delay, 0.01 seconds

Enter the amount of time before the excitation will be applied to the next repetition.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the first 1/T^2 value.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 29 -- INW Enhanced Temperature Transducer

An Input/Output Instruction that measures an Instrumentation Northwest, Inc. enhanced temperature transducer.

This instruction measures pressure and temperature.  These measurements are stored in two consecutive input locations starting at the location specified in parameter 3.

Instruction 29 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Differential Channel

•	Parameter 2 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 3 -- Destination Location

•	Parameter 4 -- Pressure Range

•	Parameter 5 -- Enhanced Parameter 2

•	Parameter 6 -- Enhanced Parameter 3

•	Parameter 7 -- Enhanced Parameter 4

•	Parameter 8 -- Enhanced Parameter 5

•	Parameter 9 -- Enhanced Parameter 6

•	Parameter 10 -- Enhanced Parameter 7

•	Parameter 11 -- Enhanced Parameter 8

•	Parameter 12 -- Enhanced Parameter 9

•	Parameter 13 -- Enhanced Parameter 10

•	Parameter 14 -- Enhanced Parameter 11

•	Parameter 15 -- Enhanced Parameter 12

•	Parameter 16 -- Enhanced Parameter 13

•	Parameter 17 -- Enhanced Parameter 14

•	Parameter 18 -- Enhanced Parameter 15

•	Parameter 19 -- Enhanced Parameter 16

•	Parameter 20 -- Enhanced Parameter 17

•	Parameter 21 -- Enhanced Parameter 18

•	Parameter 22 -- Enhanced Parameter 19

•	Parameter 23 -- Enhanced Parameter 20


Differential (DIFF) Channel

Enter the first differential analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  This sensor requires two adjacent differential channels.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the differential channel numbers are below the single-ended channel numbers.


Excitation Channel

Enter the excitation channel (E1 - E3) where the sensor has been wired.


Destination Location

Enter the input location that will store the pressure measurement.  The next consecutive location will automatically store the sensor's temperature.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Pressure Range (PSIG)

Enter the PSIG range listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 2

Enter the second Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 3

Enter the third Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 4

Enter the fourth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 5

Enter the fifth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 6

Enter the sixth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 7

Enter the seventh Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 8

Enter the eighth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 9

Enter the ninth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 10

Enter the tenth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 11

Enter the eleventh Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 12

Enter the twelfth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 13

Enter the thirteenth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 14

Enter the fourteenth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 15

Enter the fifteenth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 16

Enter the sixteenth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 17

Enter the seventeenth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 18

Enter the eighteenth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 19

Enter the nineteenth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Enhanced Parameter 20

Enter the twentieth Enhanced Measurement Parameter listed on the manufacturer's calibration sheet.


Instruction 30 --  Z = F

A Processing Instruction that stores a fixed value (F) in an input location (Z).  The fixed value is in scientific notation.  When modifying an old CR10 program, see NOTE.

Instruction 30 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- F (mantissa)

•	Parameter 2 -- Exponent of 10

•	Parameter 3 -- Z  (Input Location)

A maximum of six digits can be entered for the mantissa (decimal points and negative signs do not count as digits); however, the value cannot exceed +99,999.  When the entire number is less than or equal to six digits, it can be entered in the mantissa's parameter with a zero entered in parameter 2.

Note:   The datalogger can only process numbers between 1 x 10^(-19) and 9 x 10^18.

Examples:

For a fixed value of 3255, parameter 1's entry is 3255 and parameter 2's entry is 0.

For a fixed value of -32, parameter 1's entry is -32 and parameter 2's entry is 0, or parameter 1's entry is -3.2 and parameter 2's entry is 1 (-32 = -3.2 x 10^1).

For a fixed value of 400,000 (4 x 10^5 in scientific notation), parameter 1's entry is 4 and parameter 2's entry is 5.

For a fixed value of 0.00004 (4 x 10^(-5) in scientific notation), parameter 1's entry is 4 and parameter 2's entry is -5.


Instruction 30 Note

For 21Xs and older CR10s, instruction 30 has only two parameters (the fixed value is not in scientific notation).  This can cause unpredictable programming errors if an existing 21X or older CR10 program is modified to create a CR10X program.


F (fixed floating-point number)

Enter the mantissa.

A maximum of six digits can be entered for the mantissa (decimal points and negative signs do not count as digits); however, the value cannot exceed +99,999.  When the entire number is less than or equal to six digits, it can be entered in the mantissa's parameter with a zero entered in parameter 2.

Note:   The datalogger can only process numbers between 1 x 10^(-19) and 9 x 10^18.

Examples:

For a fixed value of 3255, this entry is 3255.

For a fixed value of -32, this entry is -32 assuming parameter 2 is 0 or this entry is -3.2 assuming parameter 2 is 1.

For a fixed value of 400,000 (4 x 10^5 in scientific notation), this entry is 4.

For a fixed value of 0.00004 (4 x 10^(-5) in scientific notation), this entry is 4.


Exponent of 10

Enter the exponent of 10.

A maximum of six digits can be entered for the mantissa (decimal points and negative signs do not count as digits); however, the value cannot exceed +99,999.  When the entire number is less than or equal to six digits, it can be entered in the mantissa's parameter with a zero entered in parameter 2.

Note:   The datalogger can only process numbers between 1 x 10^(-19) and 9 x 10^18.

Examples:

For a fixed value of 3255, this entry is 0 (3255 x 10^0 = 3255).

For a fixed value of -32, this entry is 0 when parameter 1's entry is -32 (-32 x 10^0=-32); this entry is 1 when parameter 1's entry is -3.2 (-3.2 x 10^1 = -32).

For a fixed value of 400,000 (4 x 10^5 in scientific notation), this entry is 5.

For a fixed value of 0.00004 (4 x 10^(-5) in scientific notation), this entry is -5.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the fixed value.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 31 --  Z = X

A Processing Instruction that stores an input location's value in an another input location.

Instruction 31 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Z  (Input Location)


X

Enter the original input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the value that is currently in input location X.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 32 --  Z = Z + 1

A Processing Instruction that adds a 1 to the value stored in an input location (parameter 1).

Example:   If 2 is originally stored in input location 5, this instruction will store a 3 in input location 5.


Z

Enter the input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 33 -- Z = X + Y

A Processing Instruction that adds the value stored in an input location (X) to the value stored in another location (Y).

Instruction 33 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Y  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 3 -- Z  (Input Location)


X

Enter the first input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Y

Enter the second input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the sum of the values that are stored in the other input locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 34 --  Z = X + F

A Processing Instruction that adds the value stored in an input location to a fixed number.

Instruction 34 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- F (fixed number)

•	Parameter 3 -- Z (Input Location)


X

Enter the input location that holds the value that will be added to the fixed floating point number (F).

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


F (fixed floating-point number)

Enter the number that will be added to the value in input location X.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the sum.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 35 --  Z = X - Y

A Processing Instruction that subtracts the value contained in an input location (Y) from the value contained in another input location (X).

Instruction 35 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Y  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 3 -- Z  (Input Location)


X

Enter the first input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Y

Enter the input location whose value will be subtracted from the value contained in the other location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the result.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 36 --  Z = X * Y

A Processing Instruction that multiplies the value contained in an input location (X) to the value contained in another input location (Y).

Instruction 36 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Y  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 3 -- Z  (Input Location)


X

Enter the first input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Y

Enter the second input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the product.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 37 --  Z = X * F

A Processing Instruction that multiplies the value stored in an input location (X) by a fixed floating point number (F).

Instruction 37 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- F (fixed number)

•	Parameter 3 -- Z (Input Location)


X

Enter the input location that holds the value that is multiplied by the fixed number (F).

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


F  (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will be multiplied by the value stored in input location X.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the product.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 38 --  Z = X/Y

A Processing Instruction that divides the value contained in an input location (X) by the value contained in another input location (Y).

When the value contained in Y is the number zero, 99999 will be stored.

Instruction 38 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Y  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 3 -- Z  (Input Location)


X

Enter the input location that will contain the numerator.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Y

Enter the input location that will contain the denominator.

When this input location's value is the number zero, 99999 will be stored in input location Z.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the result.  This location will store 99999 when the value contained in Y is the number zero.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 39 -- Z = SQRT(X)

A Processing Instruction that takes the square root of the value contained in an input location (X) and stores the result in another input location (Z).

When the value in X is negative, zero is stored in input location Z.

Instruction 39 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Z  (Input Location)


X

Enter the input location.  When the value stored in this location is negative, zero will be stored in Z.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the square root.  Zero is stored in this location when the value contained in X is negative.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 40 -- Z = LN(X)

A Processing Instruction that takes the natural logarithm of the value contained in an input location (X) and stores the result in another input location (Z).

When the value contained in X is zero or negative, -99999 is stored in Z.

Instruction 40 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Z  (Input Location)


X

Enter the input location.

When the value contained in this location is zero or negative, -99999 will be stored in Z.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the natural log.

When the value contained in X is zero or negative, -99999 is stored in this location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 41 -- Z = EXP(X)

A Processing Instruction that raises "base e" to the power of the value contained in an input location (X).  The result is stored in another input location (Z).

Instruction 41 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Z  (Input Location)

Examples:

When X contains a 5, the number stored is e^5 (148.41).

When X contains a 1, the number stored is e^(1) which equals e (2.72).

When X contains a -1, the number stored is e^(-1) which equals 1/e (0.37).

When X contains a -2, the number stored is e^(-2) which equals 1/(e^2).

When X contains a 0, the number stored is e^0 which equals 1.


X

Enter the input location that contains the exponent.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the result.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 42 --  Z = 1/X

A Processing Instruction that takes the inverse of the value contained in an input location (X) and stores the result in another input location (Z).

When the value contained in X is zero, 99999 is stored.

Instruction 42 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Z  (Input Location)

Examples:

When X contains a 2, 0.5 (1/2 = 0.5) is stored.

When X contains 0.5, 2 (1/(0.5) = 2) is stored.

When X contains a -2, -0.5 is stored.

When X contains -0.5, -2 is stored.


X

Enter an input location.

If the value contained in this location is zero, 99999 will be stored.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the inverse.

When the value contained in X is zero, 99999 will be stored in this location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 43 --  Z = ABS(X)

A Processing Instruction that takes the absolute value of the number stored in an input location (X) and stores the result in another input location (Z).

Instruction 43 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Z  (Input Location)

Examples:

If X contains a 5, 5 is stored in Z.

If X contains a -5, 5 is stored in Z.


X

Enter the input location that contains the value.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the absolute value.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 44 --  Z = FRAC(X)

A Processing Instruction that takes the fractional portion (i.e., the numbers to the right of the decimal) of the value contained in an input location (X).  The result is stored in another input location (Z).

Instruction 44 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Z  (Input Location)

Examples:

When the value contained in X is 6, .0 is stored.

When the value contained in X is 6.25, .25 is stored.

When the value contained in X is 0.25, .25 is stored.


X

Enter the input location that holds the number.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the fractional portion of the number.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 45 --  Z = INT(X)

A Processing Instruction that takes the integer portion (truncates the decimal portion) of the value stored in an input location (X).  The result is stored in another input location (Z).

Instruction 45 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Z  (Input Location)

Examples:

When the value contained in X is 6, 6 is stored.

When the value contained in X is 6.75, 6 is stored.

When the value contained in X is 0.75, 0 is stored.


X

Enter the input location that holds the floating point number.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the integer portion of the number.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 46 --  Z = X MOD F

A Processing Instruction that divides the value contained in an input location (X) by a fixed floating point number (F) and then stores the remainder in another input location (Z).

When F is zero, the number stored in Z is the number contained in X.

Instruction 46 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- F (fixed number)

•	Parameter 3 -- Z (Input Location)

Examples:

If X contains a 6 and F is 0, the number that will be stored in Z is 6.

If X contains a 10 and F is 5, the number that will be stored in Z is 0.

If X contains a 13 and F is 5, the number that will be stored in Z is 3.

If X contains a 0 and F is 7, the number that will be stored in Z is 0.  (When X contains a 0, the number stored in Z will always be 0.)


X

Enter the input location that contains the number that will be divided by the fixed number.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


F (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will divide the value stored in the input location.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the remainder.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 47 --  Z = X ^ Y

A Processing Instruction that raises the value contained in an input location (X) to the value contained in another input location (Y) and stores the result in a third input location (Z).

Instruction 47 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Y  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 3 -- Z  (Input Location)

Examples:

When the value contained in X is a 2 and the value contained in Y is a 3, Z will store an 8 (2^3 = 8).

When the value contained in X is a 2 and the value contained in Y is a -2, Z will store a 0.25 (2^(-2) = 1/(2^2) = 1/4).

When the value contained in X is a 4 and the value contained in Y is 0.5, Z will store a 2 (4^(0.5) = square root of 4 = 2).

When the value contained in X is a 4 and the value contained in Y is -0.5, Z will store a 0.5 (4^(-0.5) = 1/(4^(0.5)) = 1/2).

When the value contained in X is a 4 and the value contained in Y is 0, Z will store a 1 (4^0 = 1; any number to the zero power, including zero, equals 1).

When the value contained in X is a 0 and the value contained in Y is 4, Z will store a 0 (0^4 = 0; zero to the power of any number other than 0 equals 0).


X

Enter the input location that contains the base.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Y

Enter the input location that contains the exponent.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the result.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 48 --  Z = SIN(X)

A Processing Instruction that calculates the sine of the value contained in an input location (X); the value is in degrees.  The result is stored in another input location (Z).

Trigonometric identities allow this instruction to be used for other trigonometric functions.

Instruction 48 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Z  (Input Location)


Trigonometric Identities

   Trig   	Inst

 Function	Identity  	used

  cos(x)	sin(x+90)	P34, P48

  tan(x)	(sin(x))/(sin(x+90))	P48, P34, P48, P38

  cot(x)	(sin(x+90))/(sin(x))	P34, P48, P48, P38

  sec(x)	1/sin(x)  	P48, P42

  csc(x)	1/sin(x+90)	P34, P48, P42


X

Enter the input location that contains the angle in degrees.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the sine.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 49 -- Spatial Maximum

A Processing Instruction that detects the spatial maximum of a group of input locations.

This instruction can also record the number of the input location that contained the spatial maximum.

Instruction 49 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Swath

•	Parameter 2 -- 1st Location

•	Parameter 3 -- Maximum Location

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Swath

Enter the number of input locations used for finding the spatial maximum.


1st Location

Enter the initial input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Maximum Option

0xxx   	Stores the spatial maximum in location xxx.

1xxx   	Stores the spatial maximum in location xxx and the number of the input location that contained the maximum value is stored in location xxx+1.

Note:   To enter, press <ctrl> left arrow or use the computer's mouse to move the cursor to where the location number is entered.

Examples:

When this entry is 0012, the maximum is stored in input location 12.

When this entry is 1012, the maximum is stored in input location 12 and the input location number that contained the maximum is stored in input location 13.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Maximum Option

0xxx   	Stores the spatial maximum in location xxx.

1xxx   	Stores the spatial maximum in location xxx and the number of the input location that contained the maximum value is stored in location xxx+1.

Note:   To enter, press <ctrl> left arrow or use the computer's mouse to move the cursor to where the location number is entered.


Instruction 50 -- Spatial Minimum

A Processing Instruction that detects the spatial minimum of a group of input locations.

This instruction can also record the number of the input location that contained the minimum.

Instruction 50 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Swath

•	Parameter 2 -- 1st Location

•	Parameter 3 -- Minimum Location

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Swath

Enter the number of input locations used for finding the spatial minimum.


1st Location

Enter the initial input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Minimum Option

0xxx   	Stores the spatial minimum in location xxx.

1xxx   	Stores the spatial minimum in location xxx and the number of the input location that contained the minimum value is stored in location xxx+1.

Note:   To enter, press <ctrl> left arrow or use the computer's mouse to move the cursor to where the location number is entered.

Examples:

When this entry is 0012, the minimum is stored in input location 12.

When this entry is 1012, the minimum is stored in input location 12 and the input location number that contained the minimum is stored in input location 13.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Minimum Option

0xxx   	Stores the spatial minimum in location xxx.

1xxx   	Stores the spatial minimum in location xxx and the number of the input location that contained the minimum value is stored in location xxx+1.

Note:   To enter, press <ctrl> left arrow or use the computer's mouse to move the cursor to where the location number is entered.


Instruction 51 -- Spatial Average

A Processing Instruction that detects the spatial average of a group of input locations.  If parameter 1, swath, is indexed, zero values are not included in the average.

Instruction 51 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Swath

•	Parameter 2 -- 1st Location

•	Parameter 3 -- Average Location


Swath

Enter the number of input locations used for finding the spatial average.


1st Location

Enter the initial input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Average Location

Enter the input location that will store the average.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 52 -- Running Average

A Processing Instruction that computes a running average.

The most recent n values (where n is the number specified in parameter 4) are kept in intermediate storage.  When this instruction is executed, the current value writes over the oldest value then the average is calculated and stored in the destination location.

Instruction 52 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Source Location

•	Parameter 3 -- Destination Location

•	Parameter 4 -- Number of Values (n)


Repetitions

Enter the number of running averages that will be computed.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of running averages that will be computed.


1st Source Location

Enter the initial input location that contains the values that will be used to compute the running average.  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


1st Destination Location

Enter the input location that will store the initial running average.  The running averages of the repetitions will be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Number of Values in Average Window (n)

Enter the number of values that will be used to compute the running averages.


Instruction 53 --  A * X + B

A Processing Instruction that for 4 input locations multiplies the input location's value with a number (fixed floating point) then adds another number (fixed floating point) to the product and places the result in the original input location.

Instruction 53 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Start Location

•	Parameter 2 -- A1

•	Parameter 3 -- B1

•	Parameter 4 -- A2

•	Parameter 5 -- B2

•	Parameter 6 -- A3

•	Parameter 7 -- B3

•	Parameter 8 -- A4

•	Parameter 9 -- B4

Example:

For the following:

Input	Input Loc	Mult	Add

Loc No	Value (X)	 (A)	(B)

   12	     5	  2	-4

   13	     3	  1	 5

   14	   10	  6	 0

   15	   33	  0	 6

 Input location 12 will contain:    (5 x 2) + (-4) = (5 x 2) - 4 = 6.

 Input location 13 will contain:     (3 x 1) + 5 = 8.

 Input location 14 will contain:    (10 x 6) + 0 = 60.

 Input location 15 will contain:    (33 x 0) + 6 = 6


Start Location

Enter the initial input location whose value will be multiplied by the number entered in parameter 2 and that product will be added to parameter 3.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


A1 (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will be multiplied by the value contained in the initial input location.


B1 (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will be added to the product of A1 and the initial input location's value.


A2 (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will be multiplied by the value contained in the second input location.


B2 (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will be added to the product of A2 and the second input location's value.


A3 (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will be multiplied by the value contained in the third input location.


B3 (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will be added to the product of A3 and the third input location's value.


A4 (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will be multiplied by the value contained in the fourth input location.


B4 (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will be added to the product of A4 and the fourth input location's value.


Instruction 54 -- Block Move

A Processing Instruction that copies the values stored in a group of input locations to another group of input locations.

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.

Instruction 54 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Number of Values

•	Parameter 2 -- Source Location

•	Parameter 3 -- Source Step

•	Parameter 4 -- Destination Location

•	Parameter 5 -- Destination Step

The number of values, source location, and source step parameters determine which values are copied.

Examples:

For the following examples, the number of values is 4 and the source location is 1:

•	When the source step is 1, the values stored in locations 1, 2, 3, & 4 will be copied.

•	When the source step is 2, the values stored in locations 1, 3, 5, & 7 will be copied.

•	When the source step is 10, the values stored in locations 1, 11, 21, & 31 will be copied.

The destination location and destination step parameters determine where the values will be copied.

Examples:

For the following examples, the number of values is 4 and the destination location is 11:

•	When the destination step is 1, the values will be copied into locations 11, 12, 13, & 14.

•	When the destination step is 2, the values will be copied into locations 11, 13, 15, & 17.

•	When the destination step is 10, the values will be copied into locations 11, 21, 31, & 41.


Number of Values

Enter the number of values that will be copied.


Source Location

Enter the input location that holds the first value that will be copied.  For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Note:   The source step will determine the other values that will be copied.


Source Step

The following method determines the group of values that will be copied:

 Source Step

      Entry         	Copies the values from:

0	the source location into every destination location (this can be used to initialize a block of input locations with the same value such as 0)

1	consecutive locations

2	every other location

.

.

.

n	every nth location

Examples:

For the following examples, the number of values is 4 and the source location is 1:

•	When the source step is 1, the values stored in locations 1, 2, 3, & 4 will be copied.

•	When the source step is 2, the values stored in locations 1, 3, 5, & 7 will be copied.

•	When the source step is 10, the values stored in locations 1, 11, 21, & 31 will be copied.


Destination Location

Enter the input location where the first value will be copied.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Note:   The destination step determines where the other values will be copied.


Destination Step

The following method determines where the values are copied:

  Dest. Step

      Entry         	Values are copied into:

1	consecutive locations

2	every other location

.

.

.

n	every nth location

Examples:

For the following examples, the number of values is 4 and the destination location is 11:

•	When the destination step is 1, the values will be copied into locations 11, 12, 13, & 14.

•	When the destination step is 2, the values will be copied into locations 11, 13, 15, & 17.

•	When the destination step is 10, the values will be copied into locations 11, 21, 31, & 41.


Instruction 55 -- 5th Order Polynomial

A Processing Instruction that evaluates the following equation:

 F(X)=C0+C1X+C2(X^2)+C3(X^3)+C4(X^4)+C5(X^5)

Where

X -- a value stored in an input location.

C0  through  C5 -- coefficients (floating point numbers).  Coefficients outside the range of +99999 must be prescaled.

Instruction 55 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- X (Input Location)

•	Parameter 3 -- F(X)

•	Parameter 4 -- C0

•	Parameter 5 -- C1

•	Parameter 6 -- C2

•	Parameter 7 -- C3

•	Parameter 8 -- C4

•	Parameter 9 -- C5


Pre-scaling Coefficients

The X value can be scaled to change coefficients that are originally out of the +99999 range.  X is also scaled when the coefficients are close to 0 increasing the significant digits.

The X value is scaled by using Instruction 37 to multiply the X value with a fixed number (scaled value).  The scaled value can be any number that will put the coefficient within range without putting the other coefficients out of range.  When the X value is scaled, the coefficients must be changed to the following:

 C0 = C0

 C1 = C1/(scaled value)

 C2 = C2/(scaled value)^2

 C3 = C3/(scaled value)^3

 C4 = C4/(scaled value)^4

 C5 = C5/(scaled value)^5

Example:

If the original equation is:

 F(X) = 1+10X+100X^2+1000X^3+10,000X^4+100,000X^5

Coefficient C5 (100,000) is outside the range of +99999.  By using Instruction 37 with an F of 10, the coefficients become:

 C0 = 1

 C1 = 10/10 = 1

 C2 = 100/(10)^2 = 1

 C3 = 1000/(10)^3 = 1

 C4 = 10,000/(10)^4 = 1

 C5 = 100,000/(10)^5 = 1

The equation is now:

 G(X) = 1 + X + X^2 + X^3 + X^4 + X^5

Coefficient C5 is now within range.


Repetitions

Enter the number of polynomials that will be calculated.  Each polynomial uses the same coefficients (parameters 4 through 9).

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of polynomials that will be calculated.  Each polynomial uses the same coefficients (parameters 4 through 9).


X

Enter the initial input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


F(X)

Enter the input location that will store the result.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


C0 (floating point number)

Enter the C0 coefficient for the equation:

 F(X)=C0+C1X+C2(X^2)+C3(X^3)+C4(X^4)+C5(X^5)


C1 (floating point number)

Enter the C1 coefficient for the equation:

 F(X)=C0+C1X+C2(X^2)+C3(X^3)+C4(X^4)+C5(X^5)


C2 (floating point number)

Enter the C2 coefficient for the equation:

 F(X)=C0+C1X+C2(X^2)+C3(X^3)+C4(X^4)+C5(X^5)


C3 (floating point number)

Enter the C3 coefficient for the equation:

 F(X)=C0+C1X+C2(X^2)+C3(X^3)+C4(X^4)+C5(X^5)


C4 (floating point number)

Enter the C4 coefficient for the equation:

 F(X)=C0+C1X+C2(X^2)+C3(X^3)+C4(X^4)+C5(X^5)


C5 (floating point number)

Enter the C5 coefficient in the equation:

 F(X)=C0+C1X+C2(X^2)+C3(X^3)+C4(X^4)+C5(X^5)


Inst. 56 -- Saturation Vapor Pressure

A Processing Instruction that calculates saturation vapor pressure over water (SVPW) in kilopascals from air temperature (degree Celsius) and stores the SVPW in an input location.

The saturation vapor pressure over ice (0 to -50 degree C temperature range) can also be calculated.

Instruction 56 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Temperature Location

•	Parameter 2 -- Vapor Pressure Location


Vapor Pressure Over Ice

The saturation vapor pressure over ice (SVPI) is calculated with the following equation:

 SVPI = -0.0486 + 0.85471X + 0.2441X^2

Where X is the SVPW calculated by Instruction 56.

The SVPI equation is calculated with Instruction 55 using these coefficients:

C0 = -0.0486	C3 = 0

C1 = 0.85471	C4 = 0

C2 = 0.2441	C5 = 0


Temperature

Enter the input location that holds the temperature measurement.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Note:   The temperature must be in degrees Celsius.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the SVPW value.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 57 -- Vapor Pressure from Wet/Dry-Bulb Temperatures

A Processing Instruction that calculates vapor pressure (kilopascals) from wet and dry-bulb temperatures (degrees Celsius) and air pressure (kilopascals).

Often, the daily fluctuation in air pressure is small enough that a fixed entry of the standard pressure for the site's elevation is sufficient.  For increased accuracy, a pressure sensor can be used to provide the current air pressure.

Instruction 57 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Pressure Location

•	Parameter 2 -- Dry-Bulb Temperature Location

•	Parameter 3 -- Wet-Bulb Temperature Location

•	Parameter 4 -- Vapor Pressure Location


Pressure (kilopascals)

Enter the input location that holds the air pressure value.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Dry-Bulb Temperature (degrees Celsius)

Enter the input location that stores the dry-bulb temperature.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Wet-Bulb Temperature (degrees Celsius)

Enter the input location that stores the wet-bulb temperature.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the vapor pressure (kilopascals).

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 58 -- Low Pass Filter

A Processing Instruction that approximates a number for an analog resistor low pass filter with the following equation:

 F(Xi) = W*Xi + F(Xi-1)*(1-W)

 Where:	Xi = input sample,

W = user-specified weighting function where:

0 < W < 1

If W = 0, F(X1) = X1

if W = 1, F(X1) = X

F(Xi-1) = output calculated for previous sample.

On the first execution after compiling, F(X) is set equal to X.

Instruction 58 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Input X

•	Parameter 3 -- Result X

•	Parameter 4 -- Weighted F


Repetitions

Enter the number of low pass filter calculations that will be performed.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of low pass filter calculations that will be performed.


Sample

Enter the first input location that will hold the values that are sampled (e.g., the Xi values in the following equation).

F(Xi) = W*Xi + F(Xi-1)*(1-W)

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Result X

Enter the input location that will store the result.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Weighting Factor

Enter the user-specified weighting factor.

F(Xi) = W*Xi + F(Xi-1)*(1-W)

Where:	0 < W < 1

if W = 0, F(X1) = X1

if W = 1, F(X1) = X


Instruction 59 -- Bridge Transform

A Processing Instruction that calculates resistance (Rs) with the following equation:

 Rs = Rf(X/(1-X))

Instruction 59 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- X (input location)

•	Parameter 3 -- Rf (fixed multiplier)

Typically X is the input location that stores the value derived by Instructions 4, 5, 6, 8, or 9 (full bridge only) and the appropriate multiplier and offset.

The Rf value depends on whether Instruction 4, Instruction 5, or Instructions 6, 8, or 9 (full bridge only) is used.  The result is stored in the original input location.


Resistance for Instruction 4

RESISTANCE FOR X = Vx(Rs/(Rs+Rf)

Resistance	Inst.#  Mult; Offset

Rf * X/Vx 	Inst. 4   Mult=1/Vx; offset=0

Rs =	 1-X/Vx   	Inst. 59   Mult=Rf

 	Rs * (1-X/Vx)  	Inst. 4  Mult=1/Vx; offset=0

 Rf =         X/Vx	Inst. 59 Mult=1/Rs

Inst. 42


Resistance for Instruction 5

RESISTANCE FOR X = Rs/(Rs+Rf)

Resistance	Inst.#  Mult; Offset

(Rf) * X  	Inst. 5   Mult=1; offset=0

Rs =      1-X	Inst. 59   Mult=Rf

Rs * (1-X)	Inst. 5   Mult=1; offset=0

 Rf =          X	Inst. 59 Mult=1/Rs

Inst. 42


Resistance for Instructions 6, 8, & 9 (full bridge only)

RESISTANCE FOR X=1000[R3/(R3+R4)-R2/(R1+R2)]

Resistance	Inst.#   Mult; Offset

Inst 6,9 Mult=-0.001;

Inst. 8  Mult=1/Vx;

R2 * (1-X1)	Inst.6,8,9 offset = R3/(R3+R4)

 R1 =         X1  	Inst. 59   Mult = 1/R2

Inst.42

where,

X1 =(-X/1000) + (R3)/( R3+R4)

 ----------------------------------------------------------------------

 R2 =(X2/(1-X2))	Inst 6,9 Mult=-0.001;

     offset = R3/(R3+R4)

 where, X2 = X1	Inst. 59   Mult = R1

 ----------------------------------------------------------------------

 R3 = R4 * (X3/(1-X3))	Inst. 6,9 Mult=0.001;

      offset = R2/(R1+R2)

 	Inst. 59   Mult = R4

where,

X3 = (X/1000) + R2/(R1+R2)

 ----------------------------------------------------------------------

 R4 = R3 * (1-X4)/X4	Inst. 6,9 Mult=0.001;

      offset = R2/(R1+R2)

Inst. 59  Mult = 1/R3

 where, X4 = X3	Inst. 42


Resistance for Instructions 7 and 9 (half bridge only)

RESISTANCE FOR X = Rs/Rf

Resistance	Inst.#  Mult; Offset

Rs = Rf(X)	Inst. 7, 9  Mult=Rf; offset=0

Rf = Rs/X	Inst. 7, 9 Mult=1/Rs; offset=0

Inst. 42


Repetitions

Enter the number of times that the equation Rs=Rf(X/(1-X)) will be calculated.  Each repetition uses the same Rf.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of times that the equation Rs=Rf(X/(1-X)) will be calculated.


X

Enter the initial input location.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Multiplier (Rf)

Enter the Rf value for this equation Rs=Rf(X/(1-X)).

The Rf value depends on whether Instruction 4, Instruction 5, or Instructions 6, 8, or 9 (full bridge only) is used.


Multiplier (Rf)

Enter the Rf value for this equation Rs=Rf(X/(1-X)).


Instruction 60 -- Fast Fourier Transform

A Processing Instruction that performs a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) on a set of data contained in consecutive input locations.

FFT describes the relative magnitudes and phases of frequencies where there's a time varying signal.

Instruction 60 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Log base 2 of N

•	Parameter 2 -- FFT Option

•	Parameter 3 -- Log base 2 of Bins

•	Parameter 4 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 5 -- Multiplier

Notes:

(1)	Before FFT is applied, the signal must be sampled at an appropriate rate and stored in consecutive input locations.  FFT requires the signal to be sampled at a frequency that's at least two times faster than the signal's highest frequency.

(2)	Be sure there's enough input and intermediate storage allocated; see FFT Memory for more information.


FFT Memory Requirements

You must allocate enough input locations to accommodate the number of samples in the original data (the number of samples is set in parameter 1).  An error occurs when there's insufficient Input Storage.

There must be at least N/8+3 Intermediate locations allocated where N is the number of samples in the original data.  An error occurs when there's insufficient Intermediate Storage.


Log (base 2) of Samples

Enter the Log base 2 of N where N is the number of samples in the original data.

This entry must be an integer from 1 through 12.


FFT Option Codes

Option Codes

-----------------------------------------

       Frequency	|	  no

     Component Type  |	Taper	Taper

 Power Spectra	|	   00	   01

 Real & Imaginary	|	   10	   11

 Magnitude & Phase	|	   20	   21

For more information, see:

•	Power Spectra

•	Real and Imaginary Components

•	Magnitude and Phase Components

•	Taper


Power Spectra

Without Bin Averaging

The result is N/2 bins of spectral energy (PSi) representing frequencies from 0 Hz to 1/2 the sampling frequency (N is the number of original samples).  The result in each bin i has the following relationship to the magnitude (Mi) of the wave:

 PSi = 2*N*(Mi)^2

Where the magnitude is half of the zero to peak amplitude or one quarter of the peak to peak value of sinusoidal signal.

The power spectra can also be expressed as:

 PSi = N*(Ui)^2

 PSi = F*T*(Ui)^2

Where,

Ui -- the magnitude of the sine-wave multiplied by the square root of 2.

F -- the sampling frequency (Hz).

T -- the duration of the original time series data (seconds).

With Bin Averaging

When A bins are averaged, the result is (N/2A)-1 bins of average spectral energy (APSn) for frequencies from 0 Hz to 1/2 the sampling frequency.  The value for average bin n (APSn) is related to the spectral bin values (PSi, see above) by the following equation:

 APSn = ((PS1 + 0.5*(PSa + PSb)) + ... +(PSi + 0.5*(PSa + PSb)))/A

Where,

i goes from nA-(A/2 - 1) to nA+(A/2 - 1)

PSa -- the spectral bin value for bin nA-A/2

PSb -- the spectral bin value for bin nA+A/2

DC Component

The DC component will be subtracted from each value to maintain the resolution of the math in the remaining FFT calculations.  The DC component will be the square of the average of the original time series data.  The DC component will be stored in parameter 4's input location when the bins are not averaged.


Real and Imaginary Components

When this option is chosen, N results are stored in the original N input locations (N is the number of original samples).  The first half of the input locations stores the real component and the second half stores the imaginary component.  There is both a real and imaginary component for each bin.

At frequency i, the real (Ri) and imaginary (Ii) components have the following relationship with the magnitude (Mi) and phase (Pi) components:

 Ri = Mi*cos(Pi)

 Ii = Mi*sin(Pi)

DC Component

The DC component will be subtracted from each value to maintain the resolution of the math in the remaining FFT calculations.  The DC component is the average of the original time series data.  The DC component will be stored in parameter 4's input location.


Magnitude and Phase Components

When this option is chosen, there are N results which are stored in the original N input locations (N is the number of original samples).  The first half of the input locations stores the magnitude component and the second half stores the phase component.

There is both a magnitude and phase component for each bin.

Magnitude is half of the zero to peak amplitude or a quarter of the peak to peak value of the sinusoidal signal.  Phase is the angle in degrees of the cosine wave that describes the signal at a particular time.

Because the signal is periodic with a period equal to the total sampling period, the phase calculation for each frequency is the average of the phase at the beginning of the first interval and the phase at the end of the last interval.

At frequency i, the magnitude (Mi) and phase (Pi) components have the following relationship with the real (Ri) and imaginary (Ii) components:

 Mi = SQRT[(Ri)^2 + (Ii)^2]

 Pi = arctan(Ii/Ri)

To calculate magnitude and phase, the real and imaginary components must first be calculated then converted.  The conversion uses a considerable amount of the datalogger's execution time.

An alternate method is to use the real and imaginary option and then have a computer, not the datalogger, do the conversion.

DC Component

The DC component will be subtracted from each value to maintain the resolution of the math in the remaining FFT calculations.

The DC component will be the average of the original time series data.  The DC component will be stored in parameter 4's input location when the bins are not averaged.


Taper Option

A taper must be applied to the beginning and end of the data when the original data set is not periodic with an integral number of periods.

After the taper has been applied, the results will be multiplied by the ratio of the variance before the taper to the variance after the taper.

When the power spectra option is chosen, the variance ratio will be stored in the (N/2) + B input location, where N is the number of samples and B is the location that contains the first value of the original data set.


Log (base 2) of Bins

Enter the Log base 2 of the number of adjacent bins that will be averaged.  Enter a 0 for no bin averaging.

Note:   Bins can only be averaged when the Power Spectra option has been chosen for parameter 2.


Input Location

Originally this entry is the input location that contains the first value in the original time series.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Note:   After the program is executed, this location will store the DC component.  When the bins are averaged, the DC component will not be stored; instead, this location will store the first averaged value.


Instruction 61 -- Indirect Move

A Processing Instruction that copies data from one input location to another.  This is called an indirect move because each parameter refers to an input location, which contains an input location of the value to be moved.

Instruction 61 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Source X (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Destination X (Input Location)


Source X

Enter the input location that contains the input location of the value to be copied.

If this parameter is indexed, the actual input location is calculated by adding the current index counter to the value in the specified input location.  For information about indexing parameters, see Indexing Parameters.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Destination X

Enter the input location that contains the input location for the destination of parameter 1.

If this parameter is indexed, the actual input location is calculated by adding the current index counter to the value in the specified input location.  For information about indexing parameters, see Indexing Parameters.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 62 -- Covariance/Correlation

A Processing Instruction that for a set of values stored in consecutive input locations calculates the following:

•	mean (M)

•	variance (V)

•	standard deviation (SD)

•	covariance (CV)

•	correlation (CR)

The results are stored in input locations allowing the values to be further processed before being sent to a Final Storage area.  Instruction 70 must be used to transfer the results from input to Final Storage.

Instruction 62 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Number of Values

•	Parameter 2 -- Number of Means

•	Parameter 3 -- Number of Variances

•	Parameter 4 -- Number of Standard Deviations

•	Parameter 5 -- Number of Covariances

•	Parameter 6 -- Number of Correlations

•	Parameter 7 -- Number of Input Samples

•	Parameter 8 -- Source Location

•	Parameter 9 -- Destination Location


Mean of X
Mean of X  [M(X)]

M(X) = (x1 + x2 + ... +xn)/N

Where,

X -- input location X.

xn -- the nth input sample in input location X.

N -- the number of input samples in the averaging period.


Variance of X

V(X) = ((x1)^2+...+(xn)^2)/N - ((x1+ ... +xn)/N)^2

Where,

X -- input location X.

xn -- the nth input sample in input location X.

N -- the number of input samples in the averaging period.

Note:    Sometimes when computing the variance of a constant signal, round off errors produce a small negative result.  This causes the standard deviation to be 0 and the correlation to be an overrange value (+99999).


Standard Deviation of X   [SD(X)]

SD(X) = SQRT[((x1)^2+...+(xn)^2)/N - ((x1+ ... +xn)/N)^2]

Where,

X -- input location X.

xn -- the nth input sample in input location X.

N -- the number of input samples in the averaging period.

Note:    Sometimes when computing the variance of a constant signal, round off errors produce a small negative result.  This causes the standard deviation to be 0 and the correlation to be an overrange value (+99999).


Covariance of X & Y  [CV(X,Y)]

CV(X,Y) = (x1*y1 + ... + xn*yn)/N - (M(X))*(M(Y))

Where,

X -- input location X.

xn -- the nth input sample in input location X.

Y -- input location Y.

yn -- the nth input sample in input location Y.

N -- the number of input samples in the averaging period.

M(X) = (x1 + x2 + ... +xn)/N

Note:    Sometimes when computing the variance of a constant signal, round off errors produce a small negative result.  This causes the standard deviation to be 0 and the correlation to be an overrange value (+99999).


Correlation between X & Y   [CR(X)]

CR(X) = CV(X,Y)/(SD(X)*SD(Y))

Where,

SD(X) -- standard deviation of X

CV(X,Y) -- covariance of X & Y

Note:    Sometimes when computing the variance of a constant signal, round off errors produce a small negative result.  This causes the standard deviation to be 0 and the correlation to be an overrange value (+99999).


Number of Input Locations

Enter the maximum number of input locations that will be statistically processed.


Number of Means

Enter the number of means that will be calculated.

Means will be calculated for all of the input locations when this entry equals parameter 1's entry.  Otherwise the means that will be calculated are determined by the order of the input locations.  For more information, see mean (M).

Examples:

For the following examples, the number of values (parameter 1) is 20 and the initial location number (parameter 8) is 1.

•	When the number of means is 20, means will be calculated for all of locations (locations 1 - 20).

•	When the number of means is 13, means will be calculated for locations 1 - 13.

•	When the number of means is 1, mean will be calculated for location 1.

•	When the number of means is 0, mean will be calculated for none of the locations.


Number of Means

Enter the number of means that will be calculated.

Means will be calculated for all of the input locations when this entry equals parameter 1's entry.  Otherwise means that will be calculated are determined by the order of the input locations.


Number of Variances

Enter the number of variances that will be calculated.

Variances will be calculated for all of the input locations when this entry equals parameter 1's entry.  Otherwise variances that will be calculated are determined by the order of the input locations.  For more information, see variance (V).

Examples:

For the following examples, the number of values (parameter 1) is 20 and the initial input location number (parameter 8) is 1.

•	When the number of variances is 20, variances will be calculated for all of the locations (locations 1 - 20).

•	When the number of variances is 13, variances will be calculated for locations 1 - 13.

•	When the number of variances is 1, variances will be calculated for input location 1.

•	When the number of variances is 0, variances will be calculated for none of the locations.


Number of Variances

Enter the number of variances that will be calculated.

Variances will be calculated for all of the input locations when this entry equals parameter 1's entry.  Otherwise variances that will be calculated are determined by the order of the input locations.


Number of Standard Deviations

Enter the number of standard deviations that will be calculated.

The standard deviations will be calculated for all of the input locations when this entry equals parameter 1's entry.  Otherwise the standard deviations that will be calculated are determined by the order of the input locations.  For more information, see standard deviation (SD).

Examples:

For the following examples, the number of values (parameter 1) is 20 and the initial input location number (parameter 8) is 1.

•	When the number of standard deviations is 20, standard deviations will be calculated for all of the locations (locations 1 - 20).

•	When the number of standard deviations is 13, standard deviations will be calculated for locations 1 - 13.

•	When the number of standard deviations is 1, standard deviation will be calculated for location 1.

•	When the number of standard deviations is 0, standard deviation will be calculated for none of the locations.


Number of Standard Deviations

Enter the number of standard deviations that will be calculated.

The standard deviations will be calculated for all of the input locations when this entry equals parameter 1's entry.  Otherwise the standard deviations that will be calculated are determined by the order of the input locations.


Number of Covariances

Enter the number of covariances [CV(X,Y)] that will be calculated.

The covariances that will be calculated are determined by the order of the input locations (see examples).  The maximum number that can be calculated is (K/2)*(K-1), where K is parameter 1's entry.  For more information, see covariance (CV).

Examples:

For the following examples, the number of values (parameter 1) is 10 and the initial input location number (parameter 8) is 1.

•	When the number of covariances is 0, covariances will not be calculated.

•	When the number of covariances is 45 [(10/2)*(10-1)=45, the maximum number of covariances], the following covariances will be calculated:

CV(1,2)  CV(1,3)  CV(1,4)  . . .  CV(1,10)

     CV(2,3)  CV(2,4)  . . .  CV(2,10)

          CV(3,4)  . . .  CV(3,10)

. . .  CV(4,10)

.

.

.

      CV(9,10)


Number of Covariances

Enter the number of covariances [CV(X,Y)] that will be calculated.

The covariances that will be calculated are determined by the order of the input locations (see examples).  The maximum number that can be calculated is (K/2)*(K-1), where K is parameter 1's entry.


Number of Correlations

Enter the number of correlations [CR(X,Y)] that will be calculated.

The correlations that will be calculated are determined by the order of the input locations (see examples).  The maximum number of correlations that can be calculated is (K/2)*(K-1), where K is parameter 1's entry.  For more information, see correlation (CR).

Examples:

For the following examples, the number of values (parameter 1) is 10; the initial input location number (parameter 8) is 1.

•	When the number of correlations is 0, correlations will not be calculated.

•	When the number of correlations is 45 [(10/2)*(10-1)=45, the maximum number of correlations], the following correlations will be calculated:

CR(1,2)  CR(1,3)  CR(1,4)  . . .  CR(1,10)

     CR(2,3)  CR(2,4)  . . .  CR(2,10)

         CR(3,4)  . . .  CR(3,10)

. . .  CR(4,10)

.

.

.

      CR(9,10)


Number of Correlations

Enter the number of correlations [CR(X,Y)] that will be calculated.

The correlations that will be calculated are determined by the order of the input locations (see examples).  The maximum number of correlations that can be calculated is (K/2)*(K-1), where K is parameter 1's entry.


Number of Input Samples in Averaging Period

Enter the number of input samples that will be processed.  This entry should be less than or equal to the following ratio:

[Averaging period (seconds)] / [Execution Interval (seconds)]

Note:   When the number of samples is less than this ratio, for each execution interval, several subintervals will be statistically processed.  These subintervals will then be averaged and the average will be stored in the input locations.  Regardless whether all of the averaging period's samples have occurred, processing will transpire whenever the Output Flag has been set.  This accommodates situations where the Output Interval is not an integer multiple of the averaging period.


Source Location

Enter the initial input location that holds the values that will be statistically processed.  The values that will be statistically processed must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Destination Location

Enter the input location that will store the initial result.  The remaining results will be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 63 -- Extended Parameters

A Processing Instruction that is used immediately after Instruction 15, Instruction 97, or Instruction 98 to enter a variable number of parameters.

This instruction can be entered several times in a sequence.

Used After Instruction 15

Instruction 63 is used to apply ASCII filters to the received data allowing the beginning of the actual data set to be located.  Multiple filters can be applied if the data are imbedded in a long string.  This instruction is used to enter the ASCII characters for the values you want to use as a filter; separate filters by a zero.  For more information, see Filter Example.

Used After Instruction 97

Instruction 63 is for entering RF IDs, phone numbers, and optional modem command strings.  For more information, see Parameter Entries.

Used After Instruction 98

Instruction 63 is for entering the decimal values for the ASCII characters; there is a 255 character limit.


Filter Example

The following is a section of a datalogger program that uses Instruction 15 to read in data from a GPS receiver.  This program uses a filter for reading in the GGA and VTG strings.  The GGA strings include time, positon and fix related data for the GPS receiver; the VTG strings convey the actual track made good and the speed relative to the ground.  Additional data processing is required to completely decode and format these strings.

06:  Port Serial I/O (P15)

  01:	1	Reps

  02:	01	Configuration Code; RS-232 ASCII, 1200 baud

  03:	1	Delay (0.01 seconds)

  04:	8	Control Port

  05:	0	Output Loc [ ________ ]

  06:	0	no. of Locs to Send

  07:	42	Termination Character; asterisk (*)

  08:	100	Maximum Characters; GGA + VTG characters

  09:	100	CTS/Input Wait

  10:	27	Loc [ RAW_TIME]

  11:	1.0	Mult

  12:	0.0	Offset

; Configure and load input filter strings

07:  Variable Parameter (P63) or (P68)

  01:	36	Option; $

  02:	71	Option; G

  03:	80	Option; P

  04:	71	Option; G

  05	71	Option; G

  06:	65	Option; A

  07:	0	Option; END OF STRING 1

  08:	36	Option; $

08:  Variable Parameter (P63) or (P68)

  01:	71	Option; G

  02:	80	Option; P

  03:	86	Option; V

  04:	84	Option; T

  05	71	Option; G

  06:	0	Option; end of string 2

  07:	0	Option;

  08:	0	Option;


Used after Inst. 97 -- Parameter Entry

Enter one of the following:

•	An "88" (first parameter only) to increase the delay between the time the datalogger initiated call is made and the time the call-back ID is sent.

•	The length of the delay (second parameter only) when you have entered an "88" for the first parameter

•	A single-digit of the phone number

•	A single-digit of an RF ID

•	A "32" to separate RF IDs (ASCII code for space)

•	A "70" after last RF ID (ASCII code for F)

•	An "84" between an RF ID and a phone number (ASCII code for T)

•	A "13" to complete the string (ASCII code for "carriage return")

•	An ASCII code for the next character of an optional modem command string (for more information, see ASCII characters).

•	The next character of a generic modem command string (see generic modem commands).

The datalogger will automatically send the following modem commands before the phone number:

ATV0   	The phone modem uses numeric result codes rather than words.

ATS7=180	The phone modem waits 180 seconds for carrier.

ATDT    	The phone modem dials the phone number using "Touch Tones".

For more information, see the following examples:

•	Datalogger-to-Phone Example

•	Datalogger-to-RF Example

•	Datalogger-to-RF-to-Phone Example


Generic Modem Commands

The following commands are entered in Instruction 63 or Instruction 68.  Use ASCII characters for the first letter in the command but not for the n value.  The commands are entered using one parameter for the first letter of the command, another for the n value, and a separate parameter for each byte.

Command	Description

Tn{bytes}	Transmit n bytes (n > 1).

En{bytes}	Transmit n bytes and wait for an echo after each byte.

Rn{bytes}	Receive n bytes.

Dn	Delay 0.1n seconds.

Ln	Transmit the value stored in Input Location n.

ln	Transmit the value stored in Input Location n and wait for an echo after each character.

Wn	Wait 0.1n seconds before retry.  The retry will result in the last byte sent from the E command or the last sequence sent with the T command, unless the time value (n) is entered in Instruction 68 and indexed which will cause the entire call attempt to be aborted and the failure's location to be incremented immediately; for information about indexing, see Indexing Parameters.  The default timeout is 0.5 seconds.

Vn	Retrieve a value from Input Location n of a remote datalogger into Input Location n of the calling datalogger.

Un	Send the value from an input location of the local datalogger to Input Location n in the remote datalogger.

Example:

The following is a section of a Datalogger program that uses Instruction 97 and Instruction 63 or 68 to transmit data via a generic modem:

08:  Initiate Telecommunications (P97)

   01:     72	RS-232 Port Generic, 9600 baud

   02:       1	Disabled when Flag 1 is High

   03:     30	Seconds Call Time Limit

   04:     60	Seconds Before Fast Retry

   05:     00	Fast Retries

   06:     60	Minutes before Slow Retry

   07:       1	Failures Loc [ Failures ]

   08:   123	Call-back ID

; Enter the generic modem commands

 09:  Extended Parameters (P63 or P68)

   01:     87	Option ;ASCII character for W (wait before retry command)

   02:     20	Option ;2 seconds

   03:     84	Option ;ASCII character for T (transmit command)

   04:       2	Option ;2 bytes

   05:     82	Option ;first byte

   06:     83	Option ;second byte

   07:     82	Option ;ASCII character for R (receive n bytes command)

   08:       2	Option ;2 bytes

 09:  Extended Parameters (P63 or P68)

   01:     82	Option ;first byte

   02:     83	Option ;second byte

   03:     69	Option ;ASCII character for E (transmit and wait for echo command)

   04:       3	Option ;3 bytes

   05:       1	Option ;first byte

   06:       2	Option ;second byte

   07:       3	Option ;third byte

   08:       0	Option ; unused parameter


Parameter 1

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

-or-

Enter an 88 to increase the delay between the time the datalogger initiated call is made and the time the 3-digit call-back ID is sent.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII character; there is a 255 character limit.


Parameter 2

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

-or-

When you have entered an 88 first parameter, enter the length of the delay.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII character; there is a 255 character limit.


Parameter 3

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII character; there is a 255 character limit.


Parameter 4

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII character; there is a 255 character limit.


Parameter 5

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII character; there is a 255 character limit.


Parameter 6

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII character; there is a 255 character limit.


Parameter 7

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII character; there is a 255 character limit.


Parameter 8

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII character; there is a 255 character limit.


Datalogger-to-Phone Example

The following is a section of a Datalogger program that uses instruction 97 and instruction 63 or 68 to transmit data via phone modem:

 08:  Initiate Telecommunications (P97)

   01:     21	Phone Modem/1200 Baud

   02:       1	Disabled when Flag 1 is High

   03:     80	Seconds Call Time Limit

   04: 3600	Seconds Before Fast Retry

   05:       2	Fast Retries

   06: 1440	Minutes before Slow Retry

   07:       1	Failures Loc [ Failures ]

   08:   123	Call-back ID

 ; Enter phone number 555-9701

 09:  Extended Parameters (P63 or P68)

   01:       5	Option (first digit of phone #)

   02:       5	Option (second digit of phone #)

   03:       5	Option (third digit of phone #)

   04:       9	Option (fourth digit of phone #)

   05:       7	Option (fifth digit of phone #)

   06:       0	Option (sixth digit of phone #)

   07:       1	Option (last digit of phone #)

   08:     13	Option (completes the string)


Datalogger-to-RF-to-Phone Example

The following is a section of a Datalogger program that uses instruction 97 and instruction 63 or 68 to transmit data from an RF station to a computer via a phone modem:

 08:  Initiate Telecommunications (P97)

   01:     01	RF Modem/1200 Baud

   02:       1	Disabled when Flag 1 is High

   03:   360	Seconds Call Time Limit

   04: 3600	Seconds Before Fast Retry

   05:       3	Fast Retries

   06: 1440	Minutes before Slow Retry

   07:       1	Failures Loc [ Failures ]

   08:   234	Call-back ID

 ; Enter the RF ID (ID# 255) then start entering

 ; the phone number (555-9701) at the PC

 09:  Extended Parameters (P63 or P68)

  01:       2	Option (first digit of RF ID)

  02:       5	Option (second digit of RF ID)

  03:       5	Option (last digit of RF ID)

  04:     32	Option (ends RF IDs)

  05:     84	Option (separates RF and Phone)

  06:       5	Option (first digit of phone #)

  07:       5	Option (second digit of phone #)

  08:       5	Option (third digit of phone #)

 ; Enter the last digits of the phone number

 10:  Extended Parameters (P63 or P68)

   01:       9	Option (fourth digit of phone #)

   02:       7	Option (fifth digit of phone #)

   03:       0	Option (sixth digit of phone #)

   04:       1	Option (last digit of phone #)

   05:     13	Option (completes the string)

   06:       0	Option (unused parameter)

   07:       0	Option (unused parameter)

   08:       0	Option (unused parameter)


Datalogger-to-RF Example

The following is a section of a Datalogger program that uses instruction 97 and instruction 63 or 68 to transmit data via an RF modem:

 08:  Initiate Telecommunications (P97)

   01:     02	RF Modem/9600 Baud

   02:       1	Disabled when Flag 1 is High

   03:   360	Seconds Call Time Limit

   04: 3600	Seconds Before Fast Retry

   05:       3	Fast Retries

   06: 1440	Minutes before Slow Retry

   07:       1	Failures Loc [ Failures ]

   08:   220	Call-back ID

 ; Enter RF ID (ID# 255)

 09:  Extended Parameters (P63 or P68)

  01:       2	Option (first digit of RF ID)

  02:       5	Option (second digit of RF ID)

  03:       5	Option (last digit of RF ID)

  04:     70	Option (after last RF ID)

  05:     13	Option (completes the string)

  06:       0	Option (unused parameter)

  07:       0	Option (unused parameter)

  08:       0	Option (unused parameter)


Decimal Characters

The following tables lists the decimal characters that represent the ASCII characters.

•	Table 1 -- lists CONTROL, SPACE, and DEL characters.

•	Table 2 -- lists punctuation and mathematical symbols.

•	Table 3 -- lists numbers.

•	Table 4 -- lists letters.


Table 1 -- Decimal Characters for Control Characters, Spaces, & Delete

    ASCII	|	    ASCII

 Decimal	Characters	|	Decimal	Characters

      0	CONTROL @	|	     17	CONTROL Q

      1	CONTROL A	|	     18	CONTROL R

      2	CONTROL B	|	     19	CONTROL S

      3	CONTROL C	|	     20	CONTROL T

      4	CONTROL D	|	     21	CONTROL U

      5	CONTROL E	|	     22	CONTROL V

      6	CONTROL F	|	     23	CONTROL W

      7	CONTROL G	|	     24	CONTROL X

      8	CONTROL H	|	     25	CONTROL Y

      9	CONTROL I	|	     26	CONTROL Z

    10	CONTROL J	|	     27	CONTROL [

     11	CONTROL K	|	     28	CONTROL \

     12	CONTROL L	|	     29	CONTROL ^

     13	CONTROL M	|	     30	CONTROL ]

     14	CONTROL N	|	     31	CONTROL _

     15	CONTROL O	|	     32	SPACE

     16	CONTROL P	|	    127	DEL


Table 2 -- Decimal Characters for Punctuation and Math Symbols

    ASCII	|	    ASCII

 Decimal	Characters	|	Decimal	Characters

     33	       !	|	     59	         ;

     34	       "	|	     60	        <

     35	       #	|	      61	        =

     36	       $	|	      62	        >

     37	       %	|	      63	        ?

     38	       &	|	      64	       @

     39	        '	|	      91	        [

     40	        (	|	      92	        \

     41	         )	|	      93	        ]

     42	         *	|	      94	        ^

     43	        +	|	      95	        _

     44	         ,	|	      96	        `

     45	         -	|	     123	         {

     46	         .	|	     124	         |

     47	         /	|	     125	         }

     58	         :	|	     126	        ~


Table 3 -- Decimal Characters for Numbers

    ASCII

 Decimal	Characters

      48	       0

      49	       1

      50	       2

      51	       3

      52	       4

      53	       5

      54	       6

      55	       7

      56	       8

      57	       9


Table 4 -- Decimal Characters for Letters

    ASCII	|	    ASCII

 Decimal	Characters	|	Decimal	Characters

      65	        A	|	      97	        a

      66	        B	|	      98	        b

      67	        C	|	      99	        c

      68	        D	|	     100	        d

      69	        E	|	     101	        e

      70	        F	|	     102	         f

      71	        G	|	     103	        g

      72	        H	|	     104	        h

      73	         I	|	     105	         i

      74	        J	|	     106	         j

      75	        K	|	     107	        k

      76	        L	|	     108	         l

      77	        M	|	     109	       m

      78	        N	|	     110	        n

      79	        O	|	     111	        o

      80	        P	|	     112	        p

      81	        Q	|	     113	        q

      82	        R	|	     114	         r

      83	        S	|	     115	        s

      84	        T	|	     116	         t

      85	        U	|	     117	        u

      86	        V	|	     118	        v

      87	        W	|	     119	       w

      88	        X	|	     120	        x

      89	        Y	|	     121	        y

      90	        Z	|	     122	        z


Instruction 64 -- Paroscientific

A Processing Instruction that is used with Paroscientific "T" Series pressure transducers which outputs frequency in Hertz.

The periods are measured with Instruction 27.  Instruction 64 converts the periods to temperature and pressure (see paroscientific equations).

Instruction 64 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Start Location

•	Parameter 2 -- Destination Location


Paroscientific Equations

Pressure (psi) = C*(1-T0^2/Tau^2)*(1-(D*(1-T0^2/Tau^2)))

Temperature (degree Celsius) = (Y1)U + (Y2)(U^2) + (Y3)(U^3)

Where:

C = C1 + (C2)U + (C3)U^2  (psi)

T0 = T1+(T2)U+(T3)U^2+(T4)U^3+(T5)U^4,   (microseconds)

D = D1 +(D2)U,  (microseconds)

U = U(t) - U0,  (microseconds)

Tau -- measured pressure (microseconds)

U(t) -- measured temperature (microseconds)

U0, Y1, Y2, Y3, C1, C2, C3, D1, D2, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 -- calibration coefficients provided by Paroscientific.

Note:  The fourth coefficient (Y3) is entered as Y3/1000 and the eighth coefficient (D1) is entered as D1*1000.


Start Location

Enter the input location that contains the temperature's period.

The pressure's period and the 14 calibration coefficients must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Note:   The coefficients are listed on a calibration sheet provided by Paroscientific and are entered into input locations (instruction 30) in the same order as they appear on the calibration sheet.  The fourth coefficient (Y3) is entered as Y3/1000 and the eighth coefficient (D1) is entered as D1*1000.


Destination Location

Enter the input location that will store the temperature in degrees Celsius.  The next consecutive locations will store the pressure in psi and a coefficient signature.

The signature is a number unique to the value and order of the coefficients.  Signatures are identical only when the same coefficients are entered in the same order.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Example:   If this entry is 10, the temperature will be stored in location 10; the pressure will be stored in 11, and the signature will be stored in 12.


Instruction 65 -- Bulk Load

A Processing Instruction that loads up to eight fixed values into input locations.

Instruction 65 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- F (fixed floating point number)

•	Parameter 2 -- F (fixed floating point number)

•	Parameter 3 -- F (fixed floating point number)

•	Parameter 4 -- F (fixed floating point number)

•	Parameter 5 -- F (fixed floating point number)

•	Parameter 6 -- F (fixed floating point number)

•	Parameter 7 -- F (fixed floating point number)

•	Parameter 8 -- F (fixed floating point number)

•	Parameter 9 -- Input Location


Parameter 1 (F)

Enter the first fixed value.


Parameter 2 (F)

Enter the second fixed value.


Parameter 3 (F)

Enter the third fixed value.


Parameter 4 (F)

Enter the fourth fixed value.


Parameter 5 (F)

Enter the fifth fixed value.


Parameter 6 (F)

Enter the sixth fixed value.


Parameter 7 (F)

Enter the seventh fixed value.


Parameter 8 (F)

Enter the eighth fixed value.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the first fixed value.  The other values will be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 66 -- Arctangent

A Processing Instruction that calculates the angle (degrees) whose tangent is X/Y.  The signs of X and Y will determine the quadrant of the angle:

Sign	Sign

 Quadrant	of X	of Y	 Angle (degrees)

         I 	  +	  +	       0 to 90

        II 	  +	   -	     90 to 180

       III 	   -	   -	   180 to 270

       IV 	   -	  +	   270 to 0

Instruction 66 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Y  (Input Location)

•	Parameter 3 -- Z  (Input Location)


X

Enter the input location that will contain the X value of arctan X/Y.  The signs of X and Y will determine the quadrant of the angle:

Sign	Sign

 Quadrant	of X	of Y	 Angle (degrees)

         I 	  +	  +	       0 to 90

        II 	  +	   -	     90 to 180

       III 	   -	   -	   180 to 270

       IV 	   -	  +	   270 to 0

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Y

Enter the input location that will contain the Y value of arctan X/Y.  The signs of X and Y will determine the quadrant of the angle:

Sign	Sign

 Quadrant	of X	of Y	 Angle (degrees)

         I 	  +	  +	       0 to 90

        II 	  +	   -	     90 to 180

       III 	   -	   -	   180 to 270

       IV 	   -	  +	   270 to 0

If 0 is entered for this parameter the value stored in Z will be the arc tangent of X.  The result will be limited to +90 degrees.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Z

Enter the input location that will store the arctangent.  The signs of X and Y will determine the quadrant of the angle that's stored in this input location:

Sign	Sign

 Quadrant	of X	of Y	 Angle (degrees)

         I 	  +	  +	       0 to 90

        II 	  +	   -	     90 to 180

       III 	   -	   -	   180 to 270

       IV 	   -	  +	   270 to 0

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 67 -- Dynagage Processing

A Processing Instruction that calculates the sap flow rate within a plant stem by using an energy balance equation and the inputs from a Dynamax, Inc. Dynagage stem flow gage.

To calculate accumulated sap flow, use Instruction 72.

Instruction 67 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Begin Input Location

•	Parameter 2 -- Ksh (W/mV)

•	Parameter 3 -- Heater Resistance (Ohms)

•	Parameter 4 -- Stem Area (cm^2)

•	Parameter 5 -- Thermal Conductivity

•	Parameter 6 -- TC Gap

•	Parameter 7 -- Low-Flow Cutoff Temperature

•	Parameter 8 -- High-Flow Cutoff Velocity

•	Parameter 9 -- Output

•	Parameter 10 -- Destination Location

•	Parameter 11 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 12 -- Offset


Begin Input Location

Enter the input location that will hold the thermopile's measurement.

The thermopile, upper thermocouple, lower thermocouple, and the input voltage's measurements must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Note:   The thermopile, upper thermocouple, and lower thermocouple are measured with Instruction 2 using the +2.5 mV slow range (range code 01).  The input voltage is also measured with Instruction 2 but uses the +2500 mV slow range (range code 05).


Ksh (W/mV)

Enter a fixed number that will relate the thermopile output proportionally to the radial heat transfer.


Heater Resistance (ohms)

Enter the resistance of the heater.


Stem Area (cm^2)

Enter the cross sectional area of the stem.


Thermal Conductivity (W/m*K)

Generally, enter 0.54 for herbaceous plants and 0.42 for woody plants.


Thermocouple Gap (cm)

Enter the distance between the two thermocouples.


Low-flow cutoff temperature

Typically, this entry is 0.5 degrees Celsius.

Note:   At very low temperatures, the sap flows very slowly which may cause invalid outputs.  Therefore to assure accurate outputs, Instruction 67 excludes data that occur when the temperature is colder than the cutoff's temperature.


High-flow cutoff velocity

Typically, this entry is 0.042 cm/s.

Note:   Because high sap flow rates can cause invalid outputs, this parameter assures accurate outputs.


Output Codes

 Code 	Description

    0	Short outputs -- sapflow, Kshapp

    1	Long outputs -- sapflow, Kshapp, dT, Qh, Qv, Qr, Qf

For a description of the possible outputs, see Dynagage Outputs.


Dynagage Outputs

Sapflow (g/hrs) -- the calculated sap flow rate.

Kshapp (W/mV) -- the thermal conductivity when there isn't any sap flow.

dT (degree Celsius) -- the temperature after heating minus the temperature before heating.

Qh (W) -- the energy input into the stem.  This is calculated from the input voltage and heater resistance: Qh=V/R.

Qv (W) -- the vertical energy loss.  This is the loss of energy through the wood at the ends of the sensor that's not associated with the heating of the sap.

Qr (W) -- the radial energy loss.  This is the loss of energy through the cork and foam sheath on the sensor.

Qf (W) -- the energy lost through sap flow.  Qf is calculated with this equation:   Qf = Qh - (Qr+Qv).


Destination Location

Enter the input location that will store the sap's flow rate.  The other outputs will be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 68
Instruction 68 -- Extended Parameter, 4-digit

A Processing Instruction that is used immediately after Instruction 15, Instruction 97, Instruction 98, or Instruction 100 to enter a variable number of parameters.  This instruction can be entered several times in a sequence.

Used After Instruction 15

Instruction 68 is used to apply ASCII filters to the received data allowing the beginning of the actual data set to be located.  Multiple filters can be applied if the data are imbedded in a long string.  This instruction is used to enter the ASCII characters for the values you want to use as a filter; separate filters by a zero.  For more information, see Filter Example.

Used After Instruction 97

Instruction 68 is for entering RF IDs, phone numbers, and optional modem command strings.  For more information, see Parameter Entries.

Used After Instruction 98

Instruction 68 is for entering the decimal values for the ASCII characters; there is a 255 character limit.

Used After Instruction 100

Instruction 68 is used to manually override the 1502B front panel settings which are normally controlled automatically by the datalogger in conjunction with Instruction 100.  Instruction 68 affects only the Instruction 100 that immediately precedes it.

For more information, see:

•	Parameter 1

•	Parameter 2

•	Parameter 3

•	Parameter 4

•	Parameter 5

Parameters 6, 7, and 8 are not used; enter 0.


Parameter 1

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID, phone number, or the appropriate ASCII code, or enter an 88 to increase the delay between the time the datalogger initiated call is made and the time the 3-digit call-back ID is sent.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII characters; there is a 255 character limit.

Used After Instruction 100

Averaging Code	Description

2	no averaging

3	average of 2

4	average of 4 (default)

5	average of 8

6	average of 16

7	average of 32

8	average of 64

9	average of 128


Parameter 2

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code or when you have entered an 88 for the first parameter, enter the length of the delay.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII characters; there is a 255 character limit.

Used After Instruction 100

Enter the propagation velocity.

Propagation Velocity (Vp) = value * (speed of light)/100.

Default value is 99.


Parameter 3

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII characters; there is a 255 character limit.

Used After Instruction 100

Code 	Description

   1	0.05 meters/division

   2	0.10 meters/division

   3	0.25 meters/division

   4	0.50 meters/division

   5	1.00 meters/division

   6	2.50 meters/division

   7	5.00 meters/division

   8	10.00 meters/division

   9	25.00 meters/division

  10	50.00 meters/division


Parameter 4

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII characters; there is a 255 character limit.

Used After Instruction 100

Enter the gain.  The gain controls vertical gain of 1502B's display and waveform output.

To set the gain to a particular milliroe (mp), the gain number may be calculated by this equation:

   gain = 80 log(500/mp)


Parameter 5

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII characters; there is a 255 character limit.

Used After Instruction 100

Enter the offset.  The offset controls vertical positioning of the waveform.  The entry can be any integer between 1 and 1638.


Parameter 6

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII characters; there is a 255 character limit.

Used After Instruction 100

NOT USED; enter 0.


Parameter 7

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII characters; there is a 255 character limit.

Used After Instruction 100

NOT USED; enter 0.


Parameter 8

Used After Instruction 15

Enter the appropriate ASCII code for the value you want to use as a filter or enter a zero to separate filters.

Used After Instruction 97

Enter a single-digit of an RF ID or phone number or the appropriate ASCII code.

Used After Instruction 98

Enter the decimal value for the next ASCII characters; there is a 255 character limit.

Used After Instruction 100

NOT USED; enter 0.


Instruction 69 -- Wind Vector

An Output Processing Instruction that statistically processes data provided by polar (anemometer and vane) or orthogonal (fixed East and North propellers) wind speed and direction sensors.

Instruction 69 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Sample/Subintervals

•	Parameter 3 -- Sensor Type and Output Code

•	Parameter 4 -- Wind Speed or East Location

•	Parameter 5 -- Wind Direction or North Location


Polar Information

With polar sensors, this instruction does a modulo divide by 360 on wind direction, allowing the wind direction to be 0 to 360 degrees, 0 to 540 degrees, less than 0 degrees, or greater than 540 degrees.


Repetitions

Enter the number of wind sensors used.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of wind sensors used.


Samples/Subintervals

Entry	Description

0	no subintervals used

xxxx	xxxx number of scans per subinterval

Standard deviation can be processed either by using every sample taken during the output period (enter 0 for this parameter) or by averaging standard deviations processed from shorter sub-intervals of the output period.  Standard deviation is a measure of variability about a mean.  If the mean of the wind direction changes over the output interval, the standard deviation is erroneously high.  The longer the output interval, the greater the chance that the wind direction mean will change.  This is especially true under light or meandering wind conditions.  To reduce this error, the EPA recommends that hourly standard deviation of horizontal wind direction (sigma theta) be computed from four fifteen minute values using the following equation:

The datalogger uses the above equation to compute standard deviation of wind direction when the samples per sub-interval parameter is not zero.  To compute the hourly standard deviation based on four fifteen minute intervals, parameter entry = (0.25)(number of samples in the hour).

Example:

A one second measurement interval will generate 3600 samples in an hour.  Entering
(0.25)(3600) = 900 for this parameter, will cause the datalogger to compute the standard deviation as recommended by the EPA.


Sensor Type/Output Codes

 Polar	Orthogonal

Output Option	Sensor 	    Sensor

S, theta(1), sigma((theta(1)) 	    00	       10

S, theta(1) 	    01	       11

S, U, theta(u), sigma((theta(u))	    02	       12

Where:

S -- Mean of Wind Speed Scalar

U -- Mean of Wind Speed Resultant Vector

Theta(1) -- Mean of Wind Direction Unit Vector

Theta(u) -- Mean of Wind Direction Resultant Vector

Sigma(theta(1)) -- Standard Deviation of WD using Yamartino's algorithm

Sigma(theta(u)) -- Standard Deviation of WD using CSI's algorithm


Scalar Wind Speed

Measured raw data

Si = horizontal wind speed

N = number of samples

UEi = east-west component of wind

UNi = north-south component of wind

Scalar mean horizontal wind speed S:   S = S1/N + ... + Sn/N

or for orthogonal sensors:   Si = SQRT[(UEi)^2 + (UNi)^2]

Note:   When the wind speed sample is zero, 0 is used to process scalar wind speed.


Unit Vector Wind Direction

Measured raw data

theta(i) = horizontal wind direction

N = number of samples

UEi = east-west component of wind

UNi = north-south component of wind

Unit vector mean direction, theta(1):    theta(1) = Arctan(Ux/Uy)

Where:

Ux = [sin(theta(1))]/N + ... + [sin(theta(n))]/N

Uy = [cos(theta(1))]/N + ... + [cos(theta(n))]/N

or for orthogonal sensors:

Ux = (UE1/U1)/N + ... + (UEn/Un)/N

Uy = (UN1/U1)/N + ... + (UNn/Un)/N

Where:

Ui = SQRT[(UEi)^2 + (UNi)^2]

Note:   When the wind speed sample is zero, the sample is not used.


Resultant Vector Wind Direction

Measured raw data

UEi = east-west component of wind

UNi = north-south component of wind

Resultant mean wind direction, theta(u):   theta(u) = Arctan(UE/UN)

Note:   When the wind speed sample is zero, the sample is not used.


Resultant Vector Wind Speed

Measured raw data

Si = horizontal wind speed

N = number of samples

theta(i) = horizontal wind direction

UEi = east-west component of wind

UNi = north-south component of wind

Resultant mean horizontal wind speed, U:   U = SQRT[(UE)^2 + (UN)^2]

Where for polar sensors

UE = S1[sin(theta(1))]/N + ... + Sn[sin(theta(n))]/N

UN = S1[cos(theta(1))]/N + ... + Sn[cos(theta(n))]/N

or for orthogonal sensors

UE = UE1/N + ... + UEn/N

UN = UN1/N + ... + UNn/N

Note:   When the wind speed sample is zero, 0 is used to process resultant vector wind speed.


Standard Deviation -- Yamartino Algorithm

Measured raw data

N = number of samples

UEi = east-west component of wind

UNi = north-south component of wind

Standard deviation of wind direction, sigma(theta(1)):   sigma(theta(1)) = arcsin(a)[1+0.1547*(a^3)]

Where:

a = SQRT[1-((Ux)^2 + (Uy)^2)]

Ux = [sin(theta(1))]/N + ... + [sin(theta(n))]/N

Uy = [cos(theta(1))]/N + ... + [cos(theta(n))]/N

or for orthogonal sensors:

Ux = (UE1/U1)/N + ... + (UEn/Un)/N

Uy = (UN1/U1)/N + ... + (UNn/Un)/N

Where:

Ui = SQRT[(UEi)^2 + (UNi)^2]

Note:   When the wind speed sample is zero, the sample is not used for computing standard deviations.


Standard Deviation -- CSI's Algorithm

Measured raw data

Si = horizontal wind speed

N = number of samples

UEi = east-west component of wind

UNi = north-south component of wind

Standard deviation of wind direction, sigma(theta(u)):    sigma(theta(u)) = 81*SQRT[(1-U/S)]

Where:

U = SQRT[(UE)^2 + (UN)^2]

S = S1/N + ... + Sn/N

Note:   When the wind speed sample is zero, the sample is not used for standard deviations.


Wind Speed/East

Enter the initial input location that will contain a polar sensor's wind speed or an orthogonal sensor's eastern wind speed.  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Wind Direction/North

Enter the initial input location that will contain a polar sensor's wind direction or an orthogonal sensor's northern wind speed.  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 70 -- Sample

An Output Processing Instruction that when the output flag is set high, copies the current values from the specified input location(s) to final storage.

When Repetitions are greater than 1, this instruction will copy consecutive input locations.

Instruction 70 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Input Location


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations whose values will be copied to final storage.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations whose values will be copied to final storage.


Location

Enter the initial input location.  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 71 -- Average

An Output Processing Instruction that averages the values in the specified input location(s) since the last output interval and stores this average in final storage.

Instruction 71 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Input Location


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations whose values will be averaged over the given output interval.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations whose values will be averaged over the given output interval.


Location

Enter the initial input location.  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 72 -- Totalize

An Output Processing Instruction that stores the totaled value over the given output interval for each specified input location.

Instruction 72 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Input Location


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations whose values will be totaled over the given output interval.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations whose values will be totaled over the given output interval.


Location

Enter the initial input location.  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 73 -- Maximum

An Output Processing Instruction that stores the maximum value of the given output interval for each specified input location.

An internal flag is set whenever a new maximum occurs.  This flag can be tested with Instruction 79.  The time when the maximum value(s) occur can also be stored.

Instruction 73 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Time of Maximum Options

•	Parameter 3 -- Input Location


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations.


Time of Maximum Options

00	Store maximum value only (time of max. not stored).

01	Store time of maximum in seconds.

10	Store time of maximum in hours and minutes.

11	Store time of maximum in hours, minutes, and seconds.


Location

Enter the initial input location.  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 74 -- Minimum

An Output Processing Instruction that stores the minimum value of the given output interval for each specified input location.

An internal flag is set whenever a new minimum occurs.  This flag can be tested with Instruction 79.  The time when the minimum value(s) occur can also be stored.

Instruction 74 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Time of Minimum Options

•	Parameter 3 -- Input Location


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations.


Time of Minimum Options

00	Store minimum value only (time of min. not stored).

01	Store time of minimum in seconds.

10	Store time of minimum in hours and minutes.

11	Store time of minimum in hours, minutes, and seconds.


Location

Enter the initial input location.  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 75 -- Histogram

An Output Processing Instruction that processes input data as either a standard or a weighted value histogram.

Each histogram is sent to final storage when the output flag is set.

Instruction 75 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Bins

•	Parameter 3 -- Form Codes

•	Parameter 4 -- Bin Select Location

•	Parameter 5 -- Weighted Value Location

•	Parameter 6 -- Low Limit

•	Parameter 7 -- High Limit

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Standard Histogram

To select a standard histogram, enter a zero for parameter 5 input location number.

When the output flag is set, the standard histogram outputs to final storage the frequency distribution.

In other words, for each bin, the standard histogram outputs:    bin output = n/s

Where:

n  --  the number of values that are within this bin's range.

s  --  the number of input scans since the last output interval.

Also See:

Standard Histogram Examples

Defining Bins


Standard Histogram Examples

If the number of bins is 3 and the number of values that are within each bin's range is the following:

   bin	Number of values

 number	within bin's range

      1	3

      2	5

      3	2

And there are 10 scans, the output is:

bin 1 = 3/10 = 0.3

bin 2 = 5/10 = 0.5

bin 3 = 2/10 = 0.2

If the number of bins is 5 and the number of values that are within each bin's range is the following:

   bin	Number of values

 number	within bin's range

      1	6

      2	2

      3	5

      4	4

      5	7

And there are 24 scans, the output is:

bin 1 = 6/24 = 0.25

bin 2 = 2/24 = 0.08

bin 3 = 5/24 = 0.21

bin 4 = 4/24 = 0.17

bin 5 = 7/24 = 0.29


Weighted Value Histogram

Whenever the instruction is executed, the value that's stored in the weighted value input location (parameter 5) is added to a bin.

The bin where the value is added is determined by the bin select value.  When the output flag is set, each bin's summation is divided by the TOTAL number of input scans and then output to Final Storage.

In other words, the output for EACH BIN is:    bin output = w/s

Where:

w  --  the sum of the values that were in parameter 5's input location when the bin select value was in this bin's range.

s  --  the total number of input scans since the last output interval.

Also See:

Weighted Value Histogram Examples

Defining Bins


Weighted Value Histogram Examples

If for each bin, the following values were in parameter 5's input location when the bin select value was in the bin's range:

    bin	    values stored in

 number	parameter 5's location

      1	1, 3, 6

      2	       0.5, 2, 8, -1, 1

      3	13, 4

and the total number of scans is 10, the output is:

bin 1 = (1+3+6)/10 = 10/10 = 1

bin 2 = (0.5+2+8+(-1)+1)/10 = 10.5/10 = 1.5

bin 3 = (13+4)/10 = 17/10 = 1.7

If for each bin, the following values were in parameter 5's input location when the bin select value was in the bin's range:

    bin	    values stored in

 number	parameter 5's location

      1	1, 3, 6

      2	       0.5, 2, 8, -1, 1

      3	13, 4

      4	          1, 2, 0, 20

      5	      3, 11, 5, 5, 2, 1

and the total number of scans is 25, the output is:

bin 1 = (1+3+6)/25 = 10/25 = 0.4

bin 2 = (0.5+2+8+(-1)+1)/25 = 10.5/25 = 0.42

bin 3 = (13+4)/25 = 17/25 = 0.68

bin 4 = (1+2+0+20)/25 = 23/25 = 0.92

bin 5 = (3+11+5+5+2+1)/25 = 27/25 = 1.08


Defining Bins

For examples of defining bins using both the closed and open form, see Bin Examples.

Closed Form

For the closed form, each bin's range is defined by the following:

L+(i-1)(H-L)/N < bin i < L+(i)(H-L)/N

Where:

L  --  the Low Limit of the Range

H  --  the High Limit of the Range

N  --  the Number of Bins

i  --  the bin number.

As a result, bin 1 is always greater than or equal to L and the last bin is always less than H.

Open Form

The open form, is the same as the closed form, except the first bin also includes the values that are smaller than the Low Limit of the Range (L) and the last bin includes the values that are larger than the High Limit of the Range (H).


Defining Bins Examples

Closed form bins are defined as:	L+(i-1)(H-L)/N < bin i < L+(i)(H-L)/N

If L is 2, H is 10, and N is 4, the bins ranges for the closed form will be the following:

bin 1 > 2

bin 1 < 2+(1)(10-2)/4 = 4

bin 2 > 2+(2-1)(10-2)/4 = 4

bin 2 < 2+(2)(10-2)/4 = 6

bin 3 > 2+(3-1)(10-2)/4 = 6

bin 3 < 2+(3)(10-2)/4 = 8

bin 4 > 2+(4-1)(10-2)/4 = 8

bin 4 < 10

Therefore each bin's range will be the following for the closed and open forms:

Closed form

(see above)	Open form

2 < bin 1 < 4	      bin 1 < 4

4 < bin 2 < 6	4 < bin 2 < 6

6 < bin 3 < 8	6 < bin 3 < 8

8 < bin 4 < 10	8 < bin 4


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations used.  Each repetition uses the same number of bins, low limit, and high limit.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations used.  Each repetition uses the same number of bins, low limit, and high limit.


Number of Bins

Enter the number of bins used for the histogram.

For more information, see Defining Bins.


Number of Bins

Enter the number of bins used for the histogram.


Form Codes

Code	Form

   0	open

   1	closed

Where:

Open form -- values less than parameter 6  will be included in the first bin and values greater than parameter 7 will be included in the last bin.

Closed form -- values either less than parameter 6  or greater than parameter 7 will not be included.


Bin Select Value Input Location

Enter the initial input location that will contain the value that will select the bins (see Defining Bins).  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Weighted Value Input Location

Enter the label or number of the input location that holds the weighted value (see weighted value histogram).

For a standard histogram, do not enter a label or enter a 0 for the input location number.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Notes:

(1)	Repetitions use the same weighted value location unless the location is indexed.  (The input location is indexed by pressing the F4 function key after entering this parameter.)  When the location is indexed, consecutive locations are used for the repetitions.

(2)	For the standard histogram, ignore the warning that occurs when you enter a zero for the input location number.


Low Limit of the Range

Enter the low limit (L) which will be used to define the bins (see Defining Bins).


Low Limit of the Range

Enter the low limit (L) which will be used to define the bins.


High Limit of the Range

Enter the high limit (H) which will be used to define the bins (see Defining Bins).


High Limit of the Range

Enter the high limit (H) which will be used to define the bins.


Instruction 77 -- Record Real Time

An Output Processing Instruction that records the current time in Final Storage.

You have several options for recording the current time (see Parameter 1 -- Time Options).


Time Options

Code	Time Option

 xxx1	Seconds (with a resolution of 0.125 sec.)

 xx1x	HOUR-MINUTE, 0000 at midnight

 xx2x	HOUR-MINUTE, 2400 at midnight

 x1xx	Day of Year (e.g., Jan. 31 is 31, Feb. 1 is 32)

 x2xx	Day of Year, previous day at midnight

 1xxx	Year

Note:   Any combination of Year, Day, HR-MIN, and seconds is possible; enter a 0 for no output.  If a 1 is entered in the hour/minute or day-of-year position, midnight is recorded as 0000 and the date reflects the start of a new 24 hour day.  If a 2 is entered in the hour/minute or day-of-year position, midnight is recorded as 2400 hours and the date reflects the date of the last 24 hours.

For more information, see Instruction 77 Examples.


Time Options

Code	Time Option

 xxx1	Seconds (with a resolution of 0.125 sec.)

 xx1x	HOUR-MINUTE, 0000 at midnight

 xx2x	HOUR-MINUTE, 2400 at midnight

 x1xx	Day of Year (e.g., Jan. 31 is 31, Feb. 1 is 32)

 x2xx	Day of Year, previous day at midnight

 1xxx	Year

Note:   Any combination of Year, Day, HR-MIN, and seconds is possible; enter a 0 for no output.  If a 1 is entered in the hour/minute or day-of-year position, midnight is recorded as 0000 and the date reflects the start of a new 24 hour day.  If a 2 is entered in the hour/minute or day-of-year position, midnight is recorded as 2400 hours and the date reflects the date of the last 24 hours.


Instruction 77 Examples

Option Code

       Entry        	Records

       1111	year, day of year, hour, minutes, seconds

       0120	day of year, hours, minutes with midnight recorded as 2400 (seconds not recorded).  Records the same values as 0210 and 0220.

       0201	day of year with the previous day at midnight, seconds

       1100	year, day of year


Instruction 78 -- Resolution

An Output Processing Instruction that sets the Final Storage resolution for the output instructions which follow.

Parameter 1 -- Resolution Codes sets the Final Storage format as either high or low resolution.

Low resolution is the default; at the beginning of each program table execution, the resolution is low.  If an Instruction 78 is encountered that sets the resolution high, the resolution will remain high until another Instruction 78 sets it low or until the end of the table is reached.


Resolution Codes

Code	Resolution

   0	     Low

   1	    High


Instruction 79 -- Sample on Max/Min

An Output Processing Instruction that immediately follows Instruction 73 (maximum) or Instruction 74 (minimum).

Instruction 79 samples the specified input locations when a new maximum or minimum is detected.  When the output flag is set, the sampled values are transferred to Final Storage.

Instruction 79 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Starting Input Location

When Instruction 73 or 74's repetitions are greater than 1, Instruction 79 samples whenever a new maximum or minimum occurs in ANY of the locations.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations to sample when Instruction 73 or Instruction 74 detects a new maximum or minimum in its location(s).

When Instruction 73 or 74's repetitions are greater than 1, Instruction 79 samples whenever a new maximum or minimum occurs in ANY of the locations.

For general information about repetitions, see Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations to sample when instruction 73 or instruction 74 detects a new maximum or minimum in its location(s).


Location

Enter the first input location to sample.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 80 -- Set Active Storage Area

An Output Processing Instruction that redirects the output data to Final Storage area 1, Final Storage 2, or an input location.

This instruction should immediately follow the instruction that sets the output flag to 0.  If it doesn't follow an output flag instruction, a compiler warning will be displayed.

When data is sent to a Final Storage area, parameter 2 can be used to set the output array's ID.

Instruction 80 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Final Storage Area Option

•	Parameter 2 -- ID or Location

Caution:

(1)	If this instruction directs the output data to storage area 2 and no storage area 2 memory has been allocated, a warning will be displayed when the program is compiled.  You allocate memory to storage area 2 by selecting Options | Final Storage Area 2 from the Edlog menu.

(2)	Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location's Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.

(3)	A unique array ID number should be used for each output array.


Final Storage Area Option

Option	Description

    1	Send data to Final Storage Area 1.

    2	Send data to Final Storage Area 2.

    3	Send data to an input location.

Caution:

(1)	If this instruction directs the output data to storage area 2 and no storage area 2 memory has been allocated, a compiler warning will be displayed when the program is compiled.  You allocate memory to storage area 2 by selecting Options | Final Storage Area 2 from the Edlog menu.

(2)	When directing the data to an input location, the location must be allocated using Edit|Input Labels from the Edlog menu.


Location/ID

Storage area options 1 & 2

Enter the output array ID (1 through 511 are valid IDs).

Notes:

(1)	If 0 is entered, a default array ID will be used.  This default ID number will be based on the program table where the instruction appears, and the instruction's position within the table.

(2)	A unique array ID number should be used for each output array.

Storage area option 3

Enter the input location.  For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Location/ID

Storage area options 1 & 2

Enter the output array ID (1 through 511 are valid IDs).

Note: If 0 is entered, a default array ID will be used.  This default ID number will be based on the program table where the instruction appears, and the instruction's position within the table.

Storage area option 3

Enter the input location.

Caution:  When directing the data to an input location, the location must be allocated using Edit|Input Labels.


Instruction 81 -- Rainflow Histogram

An Input/Output or an Output Processing instruction that uses the rainflow counting algorithm to estimate cumulative damage fatigue on components undergoing stress/strain cycles.

Output is a two dimensional Rainflow histogram where one dimension is the amplitude of the closed loop cycle (distance between peak and valley) and the other is the mean of the cycle ((peak value + valley value)/2).

Instruction 81 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Source Location

•	Parameter 3 -- Swath

•	Parameter 4 -- Number of Mean Bins

•	Parameter 5 -- Number of Amplitude Bins

•	Parameter 6 -- Low Limit

•	Parameter 7 -- High Limit

•	Parameter 8 -- Minimum Amplitude

•	Parameter 9 -- Form and Output Option Codes

•	Parameter 10 -- Destination Location

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations used.

Each repetition will use the same number of mean bins, number of amplitude bins, low limit, high limit, minimum distance between peak and valley, and form and output option.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations used.

Each repetition will use the same number of mean bins, number of amplitude bins, low limit, high limit, minimum distance between peak and valley, and form and output option.


Source Location

Enter the initial input location that contains the values that will be processed.  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Swath

Enter the amount of data used for the rainflow histogram.  Enter a 1 for on-line processing.


Number of Mean Bins

Enter the number of bins that will be used for the mean.

For more information see, see Defining Bins.


Number of Mean Bins

Enter the number of bins that will be used for the mean.


Number of Amplitude Bins

Enter the number of bins that will be used for the amplitude.

For more information see, see Defining Bins.


Number of Amplitude Bins

Enter the number of bins that will be used for the amplitude.


Low Limit of the Range

This low limit (L) will be used to define the bins.

For more information see, see Defining Bins.


Low Limit of the Range

This low limit (L) will be used to define the bins.


High Limit of the Range

This high limit (H) will be used to define the bins.

For more information see, see Defining Bins.


High Limit of the Range

This high limit (H) will be used to define the bins.


Minimum Amplitude

Enter the smallest amplitude cycle that will be counted.

Note:   This entry should be less than the amplitude bin width ([high limit - low limit]/number of amplitude bins).  Too small of an entry wastes processing time because noise is counted.


Form and Output Option Codes

       Output codes

----------------------------------

Form	Fraction	Counts

Closed	    00	     01

Open	    10	     11

For a description of the histogram forms and the output options, see Histogram Forms and Options.


Rainflow Histogram Options and Forms

Options

Fraction -- outputs, for each bin, the number of cycles in the bin divided by the total number of cycles.

Counts -- outputs, for each bin, the actual number of closed loop cycles that are associated with the bin.

Forms

Open -- values that are less than the low limit (L) will be included in the first bin and the values that are greater than the high limit will be included in the last bin.

Closed -- values that are either less than the low limit (L) or greater than the high limit (H) will not be counted.

For more information, see:

•	Low limit (L)

•	High limit (H)

•	Defining bins


Destination Location

Enter the initial input location that will store the results.

Repetitions will be stored in consecutive locations.  For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Enter a 0 for the input location number to send output directly to Final Storage.

Note:   Ignore the warning that will occur when you enter a zero for the input location number.


Instruction 82 -- Standard Deviation

An Output Processing Instruction that calculates the standard deviation of the values that have been stored in an input location since the last output.

Instruction 82 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Location


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations whose standard deviations will be calculated.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of input locations whose standard deviations will be calculated.


Location

Enter the initial input location whose values will be used to calculate the standard deviation.  Repetitions must be stored in consecutive locations.

For more information, see General Input Location Information.


Instruction 83 -- If Case Location < F

A Program Control Instruction that executes a command if the case specified in Instruction 93 is less than F (a fixed floating point number).

Instruction 83 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- F (fixed number)

•	Parameter 2 -- Command Code

Notes:   This instruction must follow instruction 93 (BEGIN CASE) or there is an error.  When this instruction uses code 30 for parameter 2, an end instruction is required and this If Then/Else sequence may be nested.


F (fixed floating point number)

Enter the lower limit for Instruction 93.


Command Codes

Codes   	Description (also see notes)

      0	Go to the end of the program table

1-9, 79-99	Call Subroutine No. 1-9, 79-99 (e.g., code 79 calls subroutine 79)

   10-19	Set flags 0-9 high (e.g., code 10 sets flag 0 high; see note 4)

   20-29	Set flags 0-9 low (e.g., code 20 sets flag 0 low; see note 4)

     30	Then Do

     31	Exit loop if true

     32	Exit loop if false

   41-48	Set Port 1-8 high (e.g., code 41 sets port 1 high)

   51-58	Set Port 1-8 low (e.g., code 51 sets port 1 low)

   61-68	Toggle Port 1-8 (e.g., code 61 toggles port 1)

   71-78	Pulse Port 1-8 (e.g., code 71 pulses port 1)

Notes:

1.	If command code 0 is executed while in a subroutine, execution jumps directly to the end of the table that called the subroutine.

2.	If a subroutine that does not exist is called, an error occurs.

3.	Subroutines 96, 97, and 98 can be called by control ports 6, 7, and 8.

4.	Flag 0 is the output flag (this flag must be set to send data to final storage); flags 1 - 8 are user flags; flag 9 is the intermediate processing disable flag (this flag is typically only used by advanced Edlog programmers).

5.	Command codes 31 and 32 can only be used when this instruction is in a loop (Instruction 87).  Otherwise an error occurs.

6.	The ports can be indexed to the loop counter by pressing the F4 function key.


Instruction 85 -- Beginning of Subroutine

A Program Control Instruction that marks the beginning of a subroutine.  Instruction 85 is used only in the subroutine table (table 3)

Each subroutine begins with this instruction and ends with Instruction 95 (END).  If a second Instruction 85 is encountered before an END (Instruction 95), an error occurs.

Parameter 1 (Subroutine Number) labels the subroutine.  A compiler error occurs when several Instruction 85s have the same entry for parameter 1.

Subroutines may be nested (see Nesting Subroutines).


Nesting Subroutines

Subroutines may call other subroutines.

The maximum nesting level is 7.  A nesting level greater than 7 results in an error.


Subroutine Number

Enter the subroutine's number (valid entries are 1-9, 79-99).

Subroutines are executed when the subroutine number is called by a Program Control Command.  Subroutines 96, 97, and 98 can also be called by control ports 6, 7, and 8.

Note:  An error occurs when several instruction 85s have the same entry for parameter 1.


Subroutine Number

Enter the subroutine's number (valid entries are 1-9, 79-99).

Note:  An error occurs when several instruction 85s have the same entry for parameter 1.


Subroutines 96, 97, and 98

Subroutine 96, 97, or 98 will be executed after port 6, 7, or 8 goes high, respectively.  If an instruction is running when a port goes high, the instruction will be completed before the subroutine is executed.

The priority for execution of the interrupt subroutines is 98, 97, 96.  If all three ports go high at once, subroutine 98 will be executed first.

A higher ranking subroutine can interrupt a lower ranking one.  Based on the execution hierarchy, if subroutine 98 is invoked when subroutine 96 is running, subroutine 96 will be halted after completing the current instruction, continuing with the remaining instructions only after subroutine 98 has finished.  Conversely, if subroutine 98 is running and subroutine 97 is invoked, subroutine 98 must finish before subroutine 97 can begin.


Instruction 86 -- Do

A Program Control Instruction that unconditionally executes a command (see Parameter 1 -- Command Codes).


Command Codes

  Codes   	Description (also see notes)

      0	Go to the end of the program table

1-9, 79-99	Call Subroutine No. 1-9, 79-99 (e.g., code 79 calls subroutine 79)

   10-19	Set flags 0-9 high (e.g., code 10 sets flag 0 high; see note 4)

   20-29	Set flags 0-9 low (e.g., code 20 sets flag 0 low; see note 4)

     30	Then Do

     31	Exit loop if true

     32	Exit loop if false

   41-48	Set Port 1-8 high (e.g., code 41 sets port 1 high)

   51-58	Set Port 1-8 low (e.g., code 51 sets port 1 low)

   61-68	Toggle Port 1-8 (e.g., code 61 toggles port 1)

   71-78	Pulse Port 1-8 (e.g., code 71 pulses port 1)

Notes:

1.	If command code 0 is executed while in a subroutine, execution jumps directly to the end of the table that called the subroutine.

2.	If a subroutine that does not exist is called, an error occurs.

3.	Subroutines 96, 97, and 98 can be called by control ports 6, 7, and 8.

4.	Flag 0 is the output flag (this flag must be set to send data to final storage); flags 1 - 8 are user flags; flag 9 is the intermediate processing disable flag (this flag is typically only used by advanced Edlog programmers).

5.	Command codes 31 and 32 can only be used when this instruction is in a loop (Instruction 87).  Otherwise an error occurs.

6.	The ports can be indexed to the loop counter by pressing the F4 function key.


Instruction 87 -- Beginning of Loop

This is a Program Control Instruction.  Instructions that lie between this instruction and Instruction 95 (End) are repeated.

Loops can be nested, see Nesting Loops.

Instruction 87 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Delay

•	Parameter 2 -- Loop Count

When a processing instruction is used within a loop, data will be stored in the same input location with each pass through the loop unless the input location has been indexed (see note 1).  To index, press F4 while the cursor is placed within the input location parameter.  When indexed, the input location will be incremented by one with each pass through the loop.

Output instructions will use the same number of Intermediate Storage locations as when they're not in a loop.

Notes:

1.	Indexing input locations is not supported in Output Processing Instructions.

2.	Edlog does not allocate new input locations for instructions within loops.  You must allocate the input locations using the Input Location Editor.


Nesting Loops And/Or If Then/Else Sequences

Nesting is when loops and/or If Then/Else sequences are within other loops and/or If Then/Else sequences.

The If Then/Else sequences are when command code 30 is used with Instruction 83, Instruction 88, Instruction 89, Instruction 91, or Instruction 92.

Up to 11 loops and/or If Then/Else sequences can be nested.  If the nesting level is more than 11, an error occurs.  When an If Then/Else sequence uses Instruction 94 (Else), the nesting level is considered to be 2.

Indexed input locations that are within nested loops are indexed to the inner most loop (indexing input locations is only supported in Processing Instructions).


Delay

Enter how often that the passes through the loop will be executed.

The delay must be entered as a multiple of the execution interval.

Example:   If the execution interval is one second and the delay is 5, the passes through the loop are 5 seconds apart.


Loop Count

Enter the number of times to execute the loop.

When this parameter is 0, the loop will be repeated until an exit loop command (command code 31 or 32) has been executed.

Caution:   An entry of 0 without an exit loop command produces an endless loop.


Instruction 88 -- If X <=> Y

A Program Control Instruction that compares the values contained in two input locations and if the comparison is true, the specified command is executed.

Instruction 88 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Comparison Code

•	Parameter 3 -- Y (Input Location)

•	Parameter 4 -- Command Code

Note:   When this instruction uses code 30 for parameter 4, an end instruction is required and this If Then/Else sequence may be nested.


X

Enter the first input location whose value will be compared.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Comparison Codes

Code	Comparison

   1	     X = Y

   2	  X not = Y

   3	     X > Y

   4	     X < Y

Where

X -- the value contained in parameter 1's input location.

Y -- the value contained in parameter 3's input location.


Y

Enter the second input location whose value will be compared.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Command Codes

Codes   	Description (also see notes)

      0	Go to the end of the program table

1-9, 79-99	Call Subroutine No. 1-9, 79-99 (e.g., code 79 calls subroutine 79)

   10-19	Set flags 0-9 high (e.g., code 10 sets flag 0 high; see note 4)

   20-29	Set flags 0-9 low (e.g., code 20 sets flag 0 low; see note 4)

     30	Then Do

     31	Exit loop if true

     32	Exit loop if false

   41-48	Set Port 1-8 high (e.g., code 41 sets port 1 high)

   51-58	Set Port 1-8 low (e.g., code 51 sets port 1 low)

   61-68	Toggle Port 1-8 (e.g., code 61 toggles port 1)

   71-78	Pulse Port 1-8 (e.g., code 71 pulses port 1)

Notes:

1.	If command code 0 is executed while in a subroutine, execution jumps directly to the end of the table that called the subroutine.

2.	If a subroutine that does not exist is called, an error occurs.

3.	Subroutines 96, 97, and 98 can be called by control ports 6, 7, and 8.

4.	Flag 0 is the output flag (this flag must be set to send data to final storage); flags 1 - 8 are user flags; flag 9 is the intermediate processing disable flag (this flag is typically only used by advanced Edlog programmers).

5.	Command codes 31 and 32 can only be used when this instruction is in a loop (Instruction 87).  Otherwise an error occurs.

6.	The ports can be indexed to the loop counter by pressing the F4 function key.


Instruction 89 -- If X <=> F

A Program Control Instruction that compares a value contained in an input location with a fixed value (floating point number).  If the comparison is true, the specified command is executed.

Instruction 89 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- X (Input Location)

•	Parameter 2 -- Comparison Code

•	Parameter 3 -- F (fixed number)

•	Parameter 4 -- Command Code

Note:   When this instruction uses code 30 for parameter 4, an end instruction is required and this If Then/Else sequence may be nested.


X

Enter the input location that contains the value that is compared to the fixed value (F).

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Comparison Codes

Code	Comparison

   1	     X = F

   2	  X not = F

   3	     X > F

   4	     X < F

Where

X -- the value contained in parameter 1's input location.

F -- parameter 3's floating point number.


F (fixed floating point number)

Enter the number that will be compared with the value contained in parameter 1's input location.


Command Codes

  Codes   	Description (also see notes)

      0	Go to the end of the program table

1-9, 79-99	Call Subroutine No. 1-9, 79-99 (e.g., code 79 calls subroutine 79)

   10-19	Set flags 0-9 high (e.g., code 10 sets flag 0 high; see note 4)

   20-29	Set flags 0-9 low (e.g., code 20 sets flag 0 low; see note 4)

     30	Then Do

     31	Exit loop if true

     32	Exit loop if false

   41-48	Set Port 1-8 high (e.g., code 41 sets port 1 high)

   51-58	Set Port 1-8 low (e.g., code 51 sets port 1 low)

   61-68	Toggle Port 1-8 (e.g., code 61 toggles port 1)

   71-78	Pulse Port 1-8 (e.g., code 71 pulses port 1)

Notes:

1.	If command code 0 is executed while in a subroutine, execution jumps directly to the end of the table that called the subroutine.

2.	If a subroutine that does not exist is called, an error occurs.

3.	Subroutines 96, 97, and 98 can be called by control ports 6, 7, and 8.

4.	Flag 0 is the output flag (this flag must be set to send data to final storage); flags 1 - 8 are user flags; flag 9 is the intermediate processing disable flag (this flag is typically only used by advanced Edlog programmers).

5.	Command codes 31 and 32 can only be used when this instruction is in a loop (Instruction 87).  Otherwise an error occurs.

6.	The ports can be indexed to the loop counter by pressing the F4 function key.


Instruction 90 -- Step Loop Index

A Program Control Instruction that is used within a loop that has been indexed (so that the values for each pass through the loop are stored in consecutive input locations instead of overwriting the same input location).  With each pass through the loop, the index counter will be incremented by the amount specified in parameter 1 (step).

For more information, see Loop Index Example.


Loop Index Example

Suppose 4 is specified in parameter 1, the loop count is 5, and the instruction that follows this instruction stores a value in input location 1, then:

•	The first pass through the loop the value will be stored in input location = 1+(0*4)=1.

•	The second pass through the loop the value will be stored in input location = 1+(1*4)=5.

•	The third pass through the loop the value will be stored in input location = 1+(2*4)=9.

•	The fourth pass through the loop the value will be stored in input location = 1+(3*4)=13.

•	The fifth pass through the loop the value will be stored in input location = 1+(4*4)=17.


Step

Enter the amount that the locations will be incremented.


Instruction 91 -- If Flag/Port

A Program Control Instruction that executes a command when the specified flag or port status is met.

Instruction 91 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Flag or Port Option

•	Parameter 2 -- Command Code

Note:   When this instruction uses code 30 for parameter 2, an end instruction is required and this If Then/Else sequence may be nested.


Flag/Port Option

Code	Flag/Port Option

  1x	Do if flag x is high

  2x	Do if flag x is low

  4x	Do if port x is high

  5x	Do if port x is low

  40	Do if modem is on

  50	Do if modem is off

Notes:

Flag 0 is the output flag (this flag must be set to send data to final storage); flags 1 through 8 are user flags; flag 9 is the intermediate processing disable flag (this flag is typically only used by advanced Edlog programmers).

Ports 1 through 8 are available.  The ports can be indexed by pressing the F4 function key when the port number is entered.


Command Codes

  Codes   	Description (also see notes)

      0	Go to the end of the program table

1-9, 79-99	Call Subroutine No. 1-9, 79-99 (e.g., code 79 calls subroutine 79)

   10-19	Set flags 0-9 high (e.g., code 10 sets flag 0 high; see note 4)

   20-29	Set flags 0-9 low (e.g., code 20 sets flag 0 low; see note 4)

     30	Then Do

     31	Exit loop if true

     32	Exit loop if false

   41-48	Set Port 1-8 high (e.g., code 41 sets port 1 high)

   51-58	Set Port 1-8 low (e.g., code 51 sets port 1 low)

   61-68	Toggle Port 1-8 (e.g., code 61 toggles port 1)

   71-78	Pulse Port 1-8 (e.g., code 71 pulses port 1)

Notes:

1.	If command code 0 is executed while in a subroutine, execution jumps directly to the end of the table that called the subroutine.

2.	If a subroutine that does not exist is called, an error occurs.

3.	Subroutines 96, 97, and 98 can be called by control ports 6, 7, and 8.

4.	Flag 0 is the output flag (this flag must be set to send data to final storage); flags 1 - 8 are user flags; flag 9 is the intermediate processing disable flag (this flag is typically only used by advanced Edlog programmers).

5.	Command codes 31 and 32 can only be used when this instruction is in a loop (Instruction 87).  Otherwise an error occurs.

6.	The ports can be indexed to the loop counter by pressing the F4 function key.


Instruction 92 -- If Time Is

A Program Control Instruction that executes a command at a specified time.

Instruction 92 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Time into Interval

•	Parameter 2 -- Interval

•	Parameter 3 -- Command Code

Note:   When this instruction uses code 30 for parameter 3, an end instruction is required and this If Then/Else sequence may be nested.

The time is specified as the number of minutes or seconds into an interval.  The time interval is synchronized with real time, where the first interval of the day starts at midnight.

Caution:  The values entered for parameter 1 and parameter 2 must be different or the command specified in parameter 3 will never be executed.

Examples:

If a 60 minute time interval is specified with 0 minutes Into the Interval, the command is executed at 1:00 a.m., 2:00 a.m., 3:00 a.m., . . . , 10:00 p.m., 11:00 p.m., 12:00 p.m.

If a 60 minute time interval is specified with 5 minutes Into the Interval, the command is executed at 1:05 a.m., 2:05 a.m., 3:05 a.m., . . . , 10:05 p.m., 11:05 p.m., 12:05 p.m.


Time into Interval

Entry	Description

xxx	Time into interval is xxx minutes.

xxx--	Time into interval is xxx seconds (press the F4 function key to index which causes it to read seconds).

Notes:

When this parameter is NOT indexed, the units for parameter 2 are minutes; when indexed, the units are seconds.

When not indexed, this parameter's maximum value is 1439 minutes.

When indexed, enter a value less than or equal to 59.  If you enter a value greater than 59, Edlog will compile this program but you'll get an error when you attempt to download it to the datalogger.

Caution:  The value entered for this parameter must be different than parameter 2's entry or the command specified in parameter 3 will never be executed.


Interval

Enter the interval time.

Notes:

When parameter 1 is NOT indexed, the units for this parameter are minutes; when indexed, the units are seconds.

When parameter 1 is not indexed, the maximum value for this parameter is 1440 minutes.

When parameter 1 is indexed, enter a value less than or equal to 60.  If you enter a value greater than 60, Edlog will compile this program but you'll get an error when you attempt to download it to the datalogger.

Caution: The value entered for this parameter must be different than parameter 1's entry or the command specified in parameter 3 will never be executed.  If this parameter's entry is zero, the command is NOT executed.


Command Codes

Codes   	Description (also see notes)

      0	Go to the end of the program table

1-9, 79-99	Call Subroutine No. 1-9, 79-99 (e.g., code 79 calls subroutine 79)

   10-19	Set flags 0-9 high (e.g., code 10 sets flag 0 high; see note 4)

   20-29	Set flags 0-9 low (e.g., code 20 sets flag 0 low; see note 4)

     30	Then Do

     31	Exit loop if true

     32	Exit loop if false

   41-48	Set Port 1-8 high (e.g., code 41 sets port 1 high)

   51-58	Set Port 1-8 low (e.g., code 51 sets port 1 low)

   61-68	Toggle Port 1-8 (e.g., code 61 toggles port 1)

   71-78	Pulse Port 1-8 (e.g., code 71 pulses port 1)

Notes:

1.	If command code 0 is executed while in a subroutine, execution jumps directly to the end of the table that called the subroutine.

2.	If a subroutine that does not exist is called, an error occurs.

3.	Subroutines 96, 97, and 98 can be called by control ports 6, 7, and 8.

4.	Flag 0 is the output flag (this flag must be set to send data to final storage); flags 1 - 8 are user flags; flag 9 is the intermediate processing disable flag (this flag is typically only used by advanced Edlog programmers).

5.	Command codes 31 and 32 can only be used when this instruction is in a loop (Instruction 87).  Otherwise an error occurs.

6.	The ports can be indexed to the loop counter by pressing the F4 function key.


Instruction 93 -- Case

A Program Control Instruction that marks the beginning of a case statement.

Instruction 95 (End) must close the case statement.

Parameter 1 -- Case Location designates an input location whose value will be compared with a particular case.  The case is specified in Instruction 83.


Case Location

Enter the input location whose value will be compared with a particular case that is specified in Instruction 83.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 94 -- Else

A Program Control Instruction that marks the beginning of instructions to be executed when a comparison is false.  Instruction 94 is used when command code 30 is used with Instruction 83, 88, 89, 91, or 92.

An error occurs when Instruction 94 (ELSE) is used and command code 30 is not used with Instruction 83, 88, 89, 91, or 92.


Instruction 95 -- End

A Program Control Instruction that indicates the end/return of a subroutine (Instruction 85), or the end of a loop (Instruction 87), an If Then/Else sequence (command code 30 with Instruction 83, 88, 89, 91, or 92), or a case statement (Instruction 93).

Loops, If Then/Else sequences, case statements, or subroutines that are not followed by Instruction 95 (END) yield an error.

An error also occurs if Instruction 95 is used without a loop, if/then sequence, case statement, or subroutine.


Instruction 96 -- Serial Out

A Program Control Instruction that sends the data in the active Final Storage area to a storage module, computer, or printer.  This instruction also sends data to the non-active Final Storage area.

Instruction 96 is typically entered after the output instructions to transfer all of the Final Storage's data.  Other program control instructions can also be used with this instruction, allowing the data to be transferred only during specific conditions.

Parameter 1 -- Device/Baud Codes designates the device and format used, and if required, the baud rate.

Note:   Most often this instruction is used to send data to a storage module.  In this case, 71 is used for parameter 1.


Device/Baud Codes (y = baud rate code)

Code	Option/Device Description

   1y	Printable ASCII, addressed print device

   2y	Comma Separated ASCII, addressed print device

   3y	Binary Final Storage Format, addressed print device

   4y	Printable ASCII / serial printer, computer, or pin-enabled print device

   5y	Comma Separated ASCII / serial printer, computer, or pin-enabled print device

   6y	Binary Final Storage Format / serial printer, computer, or pin-enabled print device

  7N	Send data to storage module address N

  7N--	Filemark to storage module N (press F4 to index)

  80	Transfer only new data to other final storage area

  81	Transfer all data to other final storage area

Code (y)	Baud Rate

   0	300

   1	1200

   2	9600

   3	76800

   4	300 w/checksum, Comma Separated ASCII only

   5	1200 w/checksum, Comma Separated ASCII only

   6	9600 w/checksum, Comma Separated ASCII only

   7	76800 w/checksum, Comma Separated ASCII only

Notes:

•	Valid storage module addresses are numbers from 1 through 8; an entry of 71 sends the data to the storage module with the lowest address.

•	The filemark to storage module option separates the data from different outputs.

•	Transferring data to another storage area allows a fixed amount of data to be saved before and after an event.

•	If this instruction transfers the output data to storage area 2 and storage area 2 memory has not been allocated, a warning will be displayed when the program has been compiled.


Device/Baud Codes (y = baud rate code)

Code	Option/Device Description

   1y	Printable ASCII, addressed print device

   2y	Comma Separated ASCII, addressed print device

   3y	Binary Final Storage Format, addressed print device

   4y	Printable ASCII / serial printer, computer, or pin-enabled print device

   5y	Comma Separated ASCII / serial printer, computer, or pin-enabled print device

   6y	Binary Final Storage Format / serial printer, computer, or pin-enabled print device

  7N	Send data to storage module address N (valid addresses are numbers from 1 through 8)

 7N--	Filemark to storage module N (press F4 to index)

  80	Transfer only new data to other final storage area

  81	Transfer all data to other final storage area

Code (y)	Baud Rate

   0	300

   1	1200

   2	9600

   3	76800

   4	300 w/checksum, Comma Separated ASCII only

   5	1200 w/checksum, Comma Separated ASCII only

   6	9600 w/checksum, Comma Separated ASCII only

   7	76800 w/checksum, Comma Separated ASCII only


Instruction 97 -- Initiate Telecommunications

Instruction 97 is a Program Control Instruction that makes the following types of calls:

•	Datalogger calls a computer to send data.

•	Datalogger calls a voice phone using our voice-synthesized modem.

•	Datalogger calls a remote datalogger.

Instruction 97 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Modem/Baud Rate Codes

•	Parameter 2 -- Flag

•	Parameter 3 -- Time Limit on Call

•	Parameter 4 -- Fast Delay

•	Parameter 5 -- Number of Retries

•	Parameter 6 -- Slow Delays

•	Parameter 7 -- Failure Location

•	Parameter 8 -- Call-back ID

Caution:   DO NOT put Instruction 97 inside a loop or conditional statement; it must be executed each time the table is run.


Datalogger Calling a Computer

At least one Instruction 63 or Instruction 68 must follow this instruction.

When the interrupt disable flag (parameter 2) is set low and the program reaches this instruction, the CR10X uses the modem specified in parameter 1 and the path specified in Instruction(s) 63 or 68 to call a computer.

The datalogger will continue to attempt communications until the interrupt disable flag has been set high.  The interrupt disable flag is automatically set high after telecommunications has been successfully completed.

Once the datalogger connects with the computer, the datalogger identifies itself by sending the ID number specified in parameter 8.  The computer will echo the ID back to the datalogger and telecommunications is initiated when the CR10X receives the correct ID.  This ID informs the computer of the station file/setup used to collect the datalogger's data or to run any specified batch files.

If an incorrect character is received, the CR10X retransmits the ID.  If the correct response is not received within the time allotted in parameter 3, the datalogger hangs up and calls back later (see parameter 4, parameter 5, and parameter 6).  The number of unsuccessful attempts is stored in an input location (parameter 7).

Once a successful call has been made, zero will be stored in the input location.

Caution:   DO NOT put Instruction 97 inside a loop or conditional statement; it must be executed each time the table is run.


Datalogger Calling a Voice Phone

Campbell Scientific offers a separate software package which modifies a DLD file to enable voice communication when a datalogger is used with a VS1 or COM300 voice modem.  The file must first be created in Edlog, and it must include Instruction 97.  The file is then edited using the voice communication software to add the spoken messages.

When the interrupt disable flag (parameter 2) is set low and the program reaches this instruction, the CR10X uses our voice-synthesized modem to call a voice phone.  The phone number to be called is designated in the voice communication software.

The datalogger will continue to attempt communications until the interrupt disable flag has been set high.  This flag must be manually set high by the person who answers the voice phone or set high by an event in the datalogger program.

Note:   This type of call does not require a subsequent Instruction 63 or 68.  The telephone number to be dialed and the messages to be announced are added to the datalogger program using the voice communication software.  For more information, see the manual for our voice-synthesized modem.

After a person, answering machine, or pager answers the phone, the voice synthesized modem prompts the user to enter the pound key to hear the announcement.  The datalogger site is identified by the callback ID number.

The number of unsuccessful callback attempts is stored in an input location (specified by parameter 7).Once a successful call has been made, zero will be stored in the input location.

Caution:   DO NOT put Instruction 97 inside a loop or conditional statement; it must be executed each time the table is run.


Datalogger Calling a Remote Datalogger

At least one Instruction 63 or Instruction 68 must follow this instruction.  Besides specifying the modem path and/or phone number, Instruction 63 or 68 tells the remote datalogger what to do.

When the interrupt disable flag (parameter 2) is set low and the program reaches this instruction, the calling CR10X uses the modem specified in parameter 1 and the path specified by Instruction 63 or 68 to call a remote datalogger.  The calling datalogger will continue to attempt communications until the interrupt disable flag has been set high or the time allotted in parameter 3 has passed.

The flag is automatically set high after a successful call has ended.

Once the calling datalogger connects with the remote datalogger, the calling datalogger will toggle a flag in the remote datalogger and wait until that flag goes low.  The data stored in the specified input location of the remote datalogger will then be copied into consecutive input locations in the calling datalogger.  The copied data is stored in the location after the one designated in parameter 7.

Note:   Datalogger-to-datalogger calls do not allow retries of unsuccessful calls.  Parameters 4, 5, 6, and 8 are not used for datalogger-to-datalogger calls and should be left as zero.

Caution:   DO NOT put Instruction 97 inside a loop or conditional statement; it must be executed each time the table is run.


Modem/Baud Rate Codes

 Baud Rates/Codes

--------------------------------

Modems	300	1200	9600

RF (RF95)	 00	  01	  02

Direct (Short-Haul)	 10	  11	  12

Phone	 20	  21	  22

VS1 or COM300 Voice Call-Back	 NA	  31	 NA

VS1 or COM300 Data Call-Back	 40	  41	  42 (COM300 only)

RF (RF95, SDC State)	 50	  51	  52

Generic Modem	 70	  71	  72

NA -- Not Applicable

Baud Rates --the speed of transmission of information across a serial interface, expressed in units of bits per second.

For more information about generic modems, see generic modem commands.


Interrupt Disable Flag

Enter an integer from 1 through 8 to set the user flag which will be used as the interrupt disable flag.  While this flag is low, the datalogger will attempt to call a computer or voice phone.

Note:  The only indication the datalogger has that a call has been successful is that the flag has been set high.  RF, short-haul, and phone modems automatically set this flag high after a successful call has ended.  However when using a voice modem, this flag must be manually set high by the person who answers the voice phone or set high by an event in the datalogger program.  If the flag is not set high, the datalogger will continue to call on the retry intervals even though the first call may have been successful.


Time Limit on Call

Enter the number of seconds the datalogger will wait for a correct call-back ID before hanging up.  This time limit is timed from the start of the instruction and must include the dialing time.

Note:   When using voice callback, this parameter sets the amount of time before the datalogger goes into voice communication mode once this instruction has been executed.  Therefore, the time limit needs to be long enough to allow the telephone number to finish dialing.


Seconds Before Fast Retry (Fast Delay)

Enter the number of seconds the datalogger will wait before calling again if there wasn't an answer.

At first the datalogger will call back at a faster rate.  The number of calls using the fast delay is specified by parameter 5.

Notes:

(1)	Between each call, a different offset will be added to the fast delay, reducing the chances that the phone line will be busy.  The offset will always be in the range of 0 to 1/2 the fast delay.

(2)	Datalogger-to-datalogger calls do not allow retries of unsuccessful calls.  This parameter is not used for datalogger-to-datalogger calls and should be left as zero.


Number of Tries

Enter the number of retries that will use the fast delay (parameter 4).

Note:   Datalogger-to-datalogger calls do not allow retries of unsuccessful calls.  This parameter is not used for datalogger-to-datalogger calls and should be left as zero.


Minutes Before Slow Retry (Slow Delay)

Enter the number of minutes the datalogger will wait before calling again if there wasn't an answer using the fast delay (parameter 4).

The slow delay will be used until the correct response has been received or the execution interval is up.

Notes:

(1)	Between each call a different offset will be added to the slow delay, reducing the chances that the phone line will be busy.  The offset will always be in the range of 0 to 1/2 the slow delay.

(2)	Datalogger-to-datalogger calls do not allow retries of unsuccessful calls.  This parameter is not used for datalogger-to-datalogger calls and should be left as zero.


Failures Input Location

Enter the input location that will store the number of unsuccessful calls.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Call-Back ID

Using an RF, Short-Haul, or Phone Modem to Call a Computer

Enter the number the datalogger will send to the computer when the interrupt disable flag has been set low.  This ID must be correctly transmitted back to the datalogger for telecommunications to be fully established.

Datalogger-to-Datalogger Calls

This parameter is not used and should be left as zero.

Using a Voice Modem

This ID is used to identify the station that is calling.  When you answer the phone, you get the message "Press Pound to Hear Callback Message Number XXX".  XXX will be the number that has been entered for this parameter.


Instruction 98 -- Send Character

A Program Control Instruction that is used with Instruction 63 to send characters (up to 15 strings) to either an addressed or pin-enabled printer.

Instruction 98 specifies the type of printer and baud rate; Instruction 63 is for entering the characters.

This instruction has one parameter:   Parameter 1 -- Device/Baud Codes.


Device/Baud Codes

       Baud Rates/Codes

-----------------------------------------

Print Device	300	1200	9600	76800

Addressed	 10	  11	  12	  13

Pin-Enabled	 40	  41	  42	  43

Baud Rates --the speed of transmission of information across a serial interface, expressed in units of bits per second.


Instruction 99 -- Data Transfer to Valcom GOES

A Program Control Instruction that is available as a special only.  This instruction transfers the final storage data to a Valcom transmitter.  The transmitter supports one-way communications via the GOES satellite system.

Instruction 99 has one parameter:    Parameter 1 -- Buffer Selection


Buffer Selection

Code	Description

0	binary mode, appends the new data to the old

1	binary mode, writes over the old data

10	ASCII mode, appends the new data to the old

11	ASCII mode, writes over the old data

Notes:

•	The binary mode has 3-bytes per data point.

•	The ASCII mode has 7-bytes per data point.


Instruction 100 -- TDR Measurement

An Input/Output Instruction that makes Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) measurements for soil moisture or rock deformation.

The datalogger works in conjunction with a Tektronix 1502B Reflectometer through a Campbell Scientific SDM1502 interface module.

An SDMX50 multiplexer is required when more than one probe is monitored.  At least one Instruction 100 is entered for each SDMX50 that has probes that are monitored.

Instruction 100 is used to define the TDR system configuration and specify measurement addressing and output format.

Instruction 100 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- SDM1502 Address

•	Parameter 2 -- Output Options

•	Parameter 3 -- Probe Length (meters)

•	Parameter 4 -- Cable Length (meters)

•	Parameter 5 -- Multiplexer & Probe

•	Parameter 6 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 7 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 8 -- Offset

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


SDM1502 Address

Enter the value that corresponds to the base 4 address of the SDM1502 communication interface.

The address is hardware selected.  There are four 2-position switches in SDM1502 module which allow the choice of 16 different address values.  Enter the base 4 value corresponding to the SDM1502 hardware selected address (00)4 to (33)4.


Output Options

Option Code	Description

0	Water Content, PB30 probe

1	Waveform values

2	Waveform plus First Derivative

3	Electrical Conductivity

       4xxx	Water Content, 2-rod & 3-rod probes

         98	Manual Step Through

         99	Signature

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Output Options

Option Code	Description

0	Water Content, PB30 probe

1	Waveform Values

2	Waveform plus First Derivative

3	Electrical Conductivity

       4xxx	Water Content, 2-rod & 3-rod probes

         98	Manual Step Through

         99	Signature

Note:   This instruction generates multiple input locations for which Edlog does not automatically allocate input locations.


Option 0 -- Water Content, PB30 Probe

Used with the PB30 probe (formerly available from Campbell Scientific but discontinued).

The output (with a multiplier = 1 and offset=0) is the ratio (floating point number) of the probe's apparent length to the probe's actual length.  This ratio (La/L) will be written to the input location specified in parameter 6.

La/L is equal to the square root of the apparent dielectric constant and can be related to volumetric water content through a variety of linear and polynomial relationships (see the Calibration to Water Content section of the TDR manual).


Option 1 -- Waveform Values

Outputs 256 waveform values.

The waveform values will be stored in input locations, beginning with the location specified in parameter 6.

The 256 values are:

Values	Description

1 - 251	Digitized waveform as represented by floating point numbers.

  252	Cable length value as entered in parameter 4.

  253	1502B distance/division setting.

  254	1502B vertical gain setting.

  255	1502B offset setting.

  256	Repetitions


Option 2 -- Waveform plus First Derivative

Returns 507 floating point values.

The first 256 values are the same as Output Option 1; the latter 251 values are the first derivative of the waveform.


Option 3 -- Electrical Conductivity

Outputs a value that when multiplied by the probe constant determines soil bulk electrical conductivity in S/m.

The probe constant or a multiple of the probe constant can be entered in parameter 7.


Option 4xxx -- Water Content, 2 & 3-Rod
Option 4xxx -- Water Content, 2 & 3-Rod Probes

Used with 2-rod and 3-rod probes with fixed rod spacing to determine water content.

The output (with a multiplier = 1 and offset=0) is the ratio (floating point number) of the probe's apparent length to the probe's actual length.  This ratio (La/L) will be written to the input location specified in parameter 6.

La/L is equal to the square root of the apparent dielectric constant and can be related to volumetric water content through a variety of linear and polynomial relationships (see the Calibration to Water Content section of the TDR manual).

The xxx is a 3-digit integer that is the correction value for the probe.  This empirically determined value is specific for a particular probe's geometry.  The value adjusts for the portion of the probe rod contained in the epoxy probe head.  The correct integer entry is found in the documentation accompanying the Campbell Scientific probes or the TDR manual.


Option 98 -- Manual Step Through

When the program is compiled and run, the 1502B will be left under manual control and datalogger will switch to the first channel and pause.

To switch to the next channel, set flag 8; the datalogger will switch to the next channel then set flag 8 low.  Repeatedly setting flag 8 allows the user to step through all programmed channels.

Front panel controls of 1502B are active in this mode.


Option 99 -- Signature

The signature of the PROM in the SDM1502 will be calculated and stored in the input location designated in parameter 6.


Probe Length (meters)

Enter the length of the probe rods that are exposed to the medium being measured.


Cable Length (meters)

Enter the apparent length of the cable from the 1502B to the probe or enter a 0 to have the datalogger automatically search for the soil probe and attempt to calculate the apparent length.

You can use the 1502B to calculate the value if the actual cable length and propagation velocity for the cable type are known (see the TDR manual for calculation techniques).

The value is used as the initial position for the 1502B cursor from which the probe's beginning and end are determined by the datalogger's algorithm.

Notes:   The cable length specified in this parameter applies to all probes selected by this Instruction 100; therefore, all probes MUST have the same cable lengths.


Multiplexer and Probe Selection

Use the following addressing scheme to define the way the probes are connected to the 1502B (see Examples).

Addressing scheme:  ABCR

Where:

A -- Level 1 multiplexer's channel

B -- Level 2 multiplexer's channel

C -- Level 3 multiplexer's channel

R -- the number of consecutive probes; addressing starts with the channel specified for the highest level multiplexer.

Note:   enter a 0 when a level is not used.


Multiplexer and Probe Selection

Use the following addressing scheme to define the way the probes are connected to the 1502B.

Addressing scheme:  ABCR

Where:

A -- Level 1 multiplexer's channel

B -- Level 2 multiplexer's channel

C -- Level 3 multiplexer's channel

R -- the number of consecutive probes; addressing starts with the channel specified for the highest level multiplexer.

Note:   enter a 0 when a level is not used.


Multiplexer and Probe Selection Examples

Example 1

An entry of 3624:

Entry	Description

3	channel 3 is specified for the level 1 multiplexer.

 6	channel 6 is specified for the level 2 multiplexer.

  2	channel 2 is specified for the level 3 multiplexer.

   4	4 consecutive probes are read; the probes are connected to channels 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the level 3 multiplexer.

Example 2

An entry of 1008:

Entry	Description

1	channel 1 is specified for the level 1 multiplexer.

 0	the level 2 multiplexer is not used.

  0	the level 3 multiplexer is not used.

   8	8 consecutive probes are read; the probes are connected to channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the level 1 multiplexer.


Input Location

Enter the input location that will store the results.

Note:   If the Output Option is a waveform, this location will store the first data point; consecutive locations, which must be manually allocated, will store the remaining values (see EDIT|INPUT LOCATIONS).

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 101 -- SDM-INT8

An Input/Output Instruction that controls the SDM-INT8 which expands the number of pulse count channels.

The SDM-INT8 also outputs processed timing data to the datalogger.

Instruction 101 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Address

•	Parameter 2 -- Configure Channels 8, 7, 6, 5

•	Parameter 3 -- Configure Channels 4, 3, 2, 1

•	Parameter 4 -- Function for Channels 8, 7, 6, 5

•	Parameter 5 -- Function for Channels 4, 3, 2, 1

•	Parameter 6 -- Output Option

•	Parameter 7 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 8 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 9 -- Offset

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Address

Enter the SDM-INT8 address (factory set at 00).

Note:   Every SDM-INT8 connected to the datalogger must have a unique address.  Two jumpers inside the SDM-INT8 must be moved to change the address; see Appendix A in the SDM-INT8 Instruction Manual for more information.


Input Configurations for SDM-INT8 channels 8, 7, 6, 5

The first, second, third, and fourth digit configure channel 8, channel 7, channel 6, and channel 5, respectively.

Configuration Codes	Description

   0	Rising edge of a high level signal

   1	Falling edge of a high level signal

   2	Rising edge of a low level signal

   3	Falling edge of a low level signal

For more information, see Examples.


Input Configurations for SDM-INT8 channels 8, 7, 6, 5

The first, second, third, and fourth digit configure channel 8, channel 7, channel 6, and channel 5, respectively.

Configuration Codes	Description

   0	Rising edge of a high level signal

   1	Falling edge of a high level signal

   2	Rising edge of a low level signal

   3	Falling edge of a low level signal


Parameter 2 Examples

For an entry of 0123:

Channel #	Configuration

      8	Code 0; detects the rising edge of a high level signal.

      7	Code 1; detects the falling edge of a high level signal.

      6	Code 2; detects the rising edge of a low level signal.

      5	Code 3; detects the falling edge of a low level signal.

For an entry of 3001:

Channel #	Configuration

      8	Code 3; detects the falling edge of a low level signal.

      7	Code 0; detects the rising edge of a high level signal.

      6	Code 0; detects the rising edge of a high level signal.

      5	Code 1; detects the falling edge of a high level signal.


High Level Signal

Rising Edge -- the transition from below 1.5 V to above 3.5 V.

Falling Edge -- the transition from above 3.5 V to below 1.5 V.


Low Level Signal

AC signals from 20 mV to 20 V RMS with a minimum of 1 Hz.

Rising Edge -- when the voltage is increasing.

Falling Edge -- when the voltage is decreasing.


Input Configurations for SDM-INT8 channels 4, 3, 2, 1

The first, second, third, and fourth digit configure channel 4, channel 3, channel 2, and channel 1, respectively.

Configuration Codes	Description

   0	Rising edge of a high level signal

   1	Falling edge of a high level signal

   2	Rising edge of a low level signal

   3	Falling edge of a low level signal

For more information, see Examples.


Input Configurations for SDM-INT8 channels 4, 3, 2, 1

The first, second, third, and fourth digit configure channel 4, channel 3, channel 2, and channel 1, respectively.

Configuration Codes	Description

   0	Rising edge of a high level signal

   1	Falling edge of a high level signal

   2	Rising edge of a low level signal

   3	Falling edge of a low level signal


Parameter 3 Examples

For an entry of 0123:

Channel #	Configuration

      4	Code 0; detects the rising edge of a high level signal.

      3	Code 1; detects the falling edge of a high level signal.

      2	Code 2; detects the rising edge of a low level signal.

      1	Code 3; detects the falling edge of a low level signal.

For an entry of 3001:

Channel #	Configuration

      4	Code 3; detects the falling edge of a low level signal.

      3	Code 0; detects the rising edge of a high level signal.

      2	Code 0; detects the rising edge of a high level signal.

      1	Code 1; detects the falling edge of a high level signal.


Timing Functions for SDM-INT8 channels 8, 7, 6, 5

The first, second, third, and fourth digits set the timing functions for channels 8, 7, 6, and 5, respectively.

Code	Timing Function

   0	None

   1	Period in ms.

   2	Frequency in kHz.

   3	Time (ms) since previous channel's edge.

   4	Time (ms) since channel 1.

   5	Counts (linear interpolation) on channel 2 since channel 1.

   6	Low resolution frequency, kHz.

   7	Counts

Note:   An error occurs when code 8 is set on channels other than 2.

For more information, see Example.


Timing Functions for SDM-INT8 channels 8, 7, 6, 5

The first, second, third, and fourth digits set the timing functions for channels 8, 7, 6, and 5, respectively.

Code	Timing Function

   0	None

   1	Period in ms.

   2	Frequency in kHz.

   3	Time (ms) since previous channel's edge.

   4	Time (ms) since channel 1.

   5	Counts (linear interpolation) on channel 2 since channel 1.

   6	Low resolution frequency, kHz.

   7	Counts

Note:   An error occurs when code 8 is set on channels other than 2.


Parameter 4 Example

An entry of 3146:

Channel #	Timing function

       8	Code 3; measures the ms since previous channel's edge.

       7	Code 1; measures the period in ms.

       6	Code 4; measures the ms since channel 1.

       5	Code 6; measures the low resolution frequency in kHz.


Timing Functions for SDM-INT8 channels 4, 3, 2, 1

The first, second, third, and fourth digits set the timing functions for channels 4, 3, 2, and 1, respectively.

Code	Timing Function

   0	None

   1	Period in ms.

   2	Frequency in kHz.

   3	Time (ms) since previous channel's edge.

   4	Time (ms) since channel 1.

   5	Counts (linear interpolation) on channel 2 since channel 1.

   6	Low resolution frequency, kHz.

   7	Counts

   8	Counts on channel 2 since channel 1, no interpolation.

Note:   An error occurs when code 8 is set on channels other than 2.

For more information, see Example.


Timing Functions for SDM-INT8 channels 4, 3, 2, 1

The first, second, third, and fourth digits set the timing functions for channels 4, 3, 2, and 1, respectively.

Code	Timing Function

   0	None

   1	Period in ms.

   2	Frequency in kHz.

   3	Time (ms) since previous channel's edge.

   4	Time (ms) since channel 1.

   5	Counts (linear interpolation) on channel 2 since channel 1.

   6	Low resolution frequency, kHz.

   7	Counts

   8	Counts on channel 2 since channel 1, no interpolation.

Note:   An error occurs when code 8 is set on channels other than 2.


Parameter 5 Example

An entry of 3146:

Channel #	Timing function

       4	Code 3; measures the ms since previous channel's edge.

       3	Code 1; measures the period in ms.

       2	Code 4; measures the ms since channel 1.

       1	Code 6; measures the low resolution frequency in kHz.


Output Options

Option	Description

     0	Average over execution interval

    0--	Continuous averaging

 xxxx	Average is calculated over the xxxx interval (ms)

xxxx--	Capture all events until xxxx edges of channel 1

9999--	Test memory

Notes:

•	Averages are not calculated for any channel whose timing function is code 7.

•	Averages are only calculated for events that are defined by at least two edges.

•	When an event does not occur within 16.77 seconds, the SDM-INT8 enters a low power stand-by state and stops counting events.


Output Options

Option	Description

     0	Average over execution interval

    0--	Continuous averaging

 xxxx	Average is calculated over the xxxx interval

xxxx--	Capture all events until xxxx edges of channel 1

9999--	Text memory


Averaging Options 0 and 0--

Averages each channel's results over the time since the SDM-INT8 was previously run.

This time interval is typically the execution interval but can also be the time since a subroutine containing Instruction 101 has been previously run.

If processing lags the measuring/storing task, the unprocessed events will not be used and will be deleted from memory.

If no events occur during the interval, 0 will be returned for frequency and count functions and 99999 will be returned for the other functions.

Differences Between Option 0 and 0--

Option 0 ignores events that occur while the SDM-INT8 is communicating with the datalogger; option 0-- keeps capturing the edges.


Averaging Option xxxx

This option averages each channel's results over a specified (xxx) interval.

If no events occur during the specified interval, 0 will be returned for frequency and count functions and 99999 will be returned for the other functions.


Capture All Events Until xxxx Edges On Channel 1

With this option, all available timing information is output without averaging.

The data are output directly to the datalogger's Final Storage area.


Test Memory

Stores the SDM-INT8 PROM signature in an input location.

When the SDM-INT8 PROM signature is a:

Positive Integer -- both the ROM and RAM are good.

Negative Integer -- the ROM is good but the RAM is bad.

0 -- the ROM is bad but the RAM is good.

-0 -- both the ROM and RAM are bad.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the data for channel 1.  Data for the other channels will be stored in consecutive locations.

These input locations will not be used when parameter 6 is option xxxx-- because the data will be stored directly into the datalogger's Final Storage area.

For more information, see Input Location Information.

Example:

With an entry of 15 and parameter 6 is not option xxxx--, the following input locations store the data:

Data stored in

Channel #	Input Location:

      1	        15

      2	        16

      3	        17

      4	        18

      5	        19

      6	        20

      7	        21

      8	        22


Instruction 102 -- SDM-SW8A

An Input/Output Instruction that controls the SDM-SW8A peripheral which increases the number of channels available for switch closure pulse counts.

Each SDM-SW8A contains 8 channels.

Instruction 102 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Address

•	Parameter 3 -- Function

•	Parameter 4 -- Channel

•	Parameter 5 -- Location

•	Parameter 6 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 7 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of SDM-SW8A channels that will be read.

If repetitions are greater than eight, the datalogger automatically continues to the next SDM-SW8A (must have consecutive addresses).

All repetitions use the same function option, multiplier, and offset.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of SDM-SW8A channels that will be read.

If repetitions are greater than eight, the datalogger automatically continues to the next SDM-SW8A (must have consecutive addresses).

All repetitions use the same function option, multiplier, and offset.


Address

Enter the SDM-SW8A's address (factory set at 00).  Every SDM-SW8A connected to the datalogger must have a unique address.

Note:   Jumpers inside the SDM-SW8A must be moved to change the address; see the SDM-SW8A Instruction Manual for more information.


Function Code

Code	Function

   0	Channel's state (stores a 0 for low and a 1 for high)

   1	Duty Cycle (stores the % of time the signal is high during the interval)

   2	Count (number of positive transitions of the signal)

   3	Signature

Note:   The signature function will store a positive integer to indicate both the ROM and RAM are good, a negative value to indicate the RAM is bad, or a zero to indicate the ROM is bad.


Channel

Enter the initial SDM-SW8A channel that will be read.  Repetitions must be wired in consecutive channels.


Location

Enter the input location which will store the first measurements.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 103 -- SDM-AO4

An Input/Output Instruction that controls the SDM-AO4 peripheral which provides four independent continuous analog outputs for proportional control or strip chart recordings.

Instruction 103 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Address

•	Parameter 3 -- Location


Repetitions

Enter the number of SDM-AO4 output channels that will be set.

If the repetitions are greater than four, the datalogger automatically continues to the next SDM-AO4 (must have consecutive addresses).

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of SDM-AO4 output channels that will be set; maximum number is 64.

If the repetitions are greater than four, the datalogger automatically continues to the next SDM-AO4 (must have consecutive addresses).


Address

Enter the SDM-AO4's address.

Note:   Every SDM-AO4 connected to the datalogger must have a unique address.  Jumpers inside the SDM-AO4 must be moved to change the address; see the SDM-AO4 Instruction Manual for more information.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the first measurement.

For more information about input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 104 -- SDM-CD16 and SDM-CD16AC

An Input/Output Instruction that controls the SDM-CD16 and SDM-CD16AC peripherals which increase the number of control ports (the SDM-CD16AC can control both AC and DC devices).

Instruction 104 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Address

•	Parameter 3 -- Location


Repetitions

Enter the number of SDM-CD16s or SDM-CD16ACs that will be connected to the datalogger.  Each SDM must have a consecutive address.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of SDM-CD16s or SDM-CD16ACs that will be connected to the datalogger.  Each SDM must have a consecutive address.


Address

Enter the SDM-CD16 or SDM-CD16AC's address (factory set at 00).

Note:   Every SDM-CD16 or SDM-CD16AC connected to the datalogger must have a unique address.  Jumpers inside the SDM-CD16 must be moved to change the address; the SDM-CD16AC's address is adjusted externally (see the SDM-CD16 or SDM-CD16AC Instruction Manual for more information).


Location

Enter the input location that will store the value that will either enable or disable port 1 on the first SDM-CD16 or SDM-CD16AC; non-zero values enable the ports and zeros disable the ports.

The values stored in consecutive locations will enable or disable the other ports.

Example:

If Repetitions are 2 and this entry is 10:

Input Location	  Enables or

     Number:    	Disables Port:

        10	1 on the first SDM

        11	2 on the first SDM

         .	.

         .	.

         .	.

        25	16 on the first SDM

        26	1 on the second SDM

         .	.

         .	.

         .	.

        41	16 on the second SDM

For more information about input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 105 -- SDI-12 Recorder

An Input/Output Instruction that allows data to be collected from an SDI-12 sensor; each sensor requires a separate instruction 105.

Note:   Instruction 106 enables a CR10X to be used as an SDI-12 sensor.

Instruction 105 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Address

•	Parameter 2 -- Command

•	Parameter 3 -- Port

•	Parameter 4 -- Location

•	Parameter 5 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 6 -- Offset

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Address

Enter the address that will identify the SDI-12 sensor.

Valid Entries

Entry	Description

0 - 9	standard addresses

65 - 90	decimal values for ASCII upper-case letters

97 - 122	decimal values for ASCII lower-case letters

For a list of the decimal values for the upper- or lower-case letters, click on Decimal Characters for Letters.


Address

Enter the address that will identify the SDI-12 sensor.

Valid Entries

Entry	Description

0 - 9	standard addresses

65 - 90	decimal values for ASCII upper-case letters

97 - 122	decimal values for ASCII lower-case letters


Command Code
Command Codes

Entry	Command	Description

    0	       M	Initiate measurements

   0--	       C	Initiate concurrent measurement

 1 - 9	  M1 - M9	Additional measurement commands specified by

the SDI-12 sensor.

   10	       V	Initiate verify sequence.

   11	        I	Send identification.

Notes:

•	M, M1-M9, and V command sequences have numerical results that are stored in the input location specified in parameter 4.

•	The I command's response is text which is put directly into the Final Storage area.


Port

Enter the CR10X control port where the SDI-12 sensor will be wired (default is C8).


Location

Enter the input location that will store the SDI-12 sensor's data.  Multiple values will be stored in consecutive locations.

If the CR10X receives incorrect or no responses from the SDI-12 sensor, the CR10X will retry the operation.  If the datalogger doesn't receive a valid response, -9999 will be stored in the first input location; the other locations will contain the previous responses.

For more information about input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 106 -- SDI-12 Sensor

An Input/Output Instruction that allows a CR10X to be used as an SDI-12 sensor by supplying measurement data to an SDI-12 recorder (see instruction 105).

Instruction 106 should always be the second instruction in subroutine 98; the first instruction must be Instruction 85 (begin subroutine).  For the CR10X to operate like an SDI-12 sensor, an SDI-12's data line must be wired into the CR10X's control port 8.  This allows subroutine 98 to be called whenever there is activity on the data line.

There are two datalogger programming techniques which use instruction 106.  For information, see Measurement Technique 1, Measurement Technique 2, and Combination of Techniques.

Instruction 106 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Address

•	Parameter 2 -- Time/Values Codes

•	Parameter 3 -- Location

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Measurement Technique 1

Enter the measurement instructions in subroutine 98.  This causes the measurements to be made in response to the recorder's command.


Measurement Technique 2

Enter the measurement instructions in the main program (table 1 or 2) and have subroutine 98 contain only Instructions 85 (begin subroutine), 106 (SDI-12 sensor), and 95 (end).

The advantage of this technique is that the CR10X will make and store measurements independently of the SDI-12 recorder.


Combination of Techniques

Combining the techniques allows the CR10X to be used as an SDI-12 sensor while the CR10X also makes independent measurements.

The following rules must be observed or measurements might be missed:

1.	The execution interval of the main program (table 1 or 2) must be longer than subroutine 98's execution rate.

2.	If the main program is executed often, each of the main program's instructions must execute in less than 1/3 second; most instructions execute fast enough.


Address

Enter the address for the CR10X.  The CR10X must have a unique address.

Valid Entries

Entry	Description

0 - 9	standard addresses

65 - 90	decimal values for ASCII upper-case letters

97 - 122	decimal values for ASCII lower-case letters

For a list of the decimal values for the upper- or lower-case letters, click on Decimal Characters for Letters.

Note:  The SDI-12 recorder transmits to the CR10X a Break and the CR10X's address.  If the Break and address are not received, the measurements are not supplied to the recorder and the remainder of the subroutine is not executed.


Address

Enter the address for the CR10X.  The CR10X must have a unique address.

Valid Entries

Entry	Description

0 - 9	standard addresses

65 - 90	decimal values for ASCII upper-case letters

97 - 122	decimal values for ASCII lower-case letters


Time/Values

Enter in the form of ttnn, where:

tt -- the time (seconds) required to complete subroutine 98.

nn -- the number of input location values used.

Note:  This instruction should always be the second instruction in subroutine 98; the first instruction must be Instruction 85 (begin subroutine).  For the CR10X to operate like an SDI-12 sensor, an SDI-12's data line must be wired into the CR10X's control port 8.  This allows subroutine 98 to be called whenever there is activity on the data line.


Time/Values

Enter in the form of ttnn, where:

tt -- the time (seconds) required to complete subroutine 98.

nn -- the number of input location values used.


Location

Enter the initial input location whose values will be sent to the SDI-12 recorder.

The number of input locations sent depends on Instruction 105 in the SDI-12 recorder datalogger.  For more information about the starting input location in the sensor datalogger and number of values requested by the recorder datalogger, see:

•	Commands M, M1-M9

•	Command V

•	Command I

For detailed information about input locations, see Input Location Information.


SDI-12 Recorder Commands M, M1 - M9

With these commands, the input locations will store measurements.

Each command's initial input location number will be:	(parameter 3) + (n*x)

Where:

n	Specified in parameter 2

x	The number after the M command; a 0 for command M or a number from 1 through 9 for commands M1 - M9.


SDI-12 Recorder Command V

Three values will be sent in response to this command.  The first value will be the number of watchdog errors; the second will be the number of table overrun errors and the third will be a signature of the CR10X's memory.

The signature allows the detection of program changes or ROM failure and will be determined by the CR10X PROM, the size of RAM, and the entries in tables 1, 2, and 3 and the *A and *C modes.


SDI-12 Recorder Command I

The CR10X will send directly to the Final Storage area this string:

10CAMPBELL CR10X 001 aaaa

Where:

aaaa -- the number from the eighth window of the *B mode.


Instruction 107 -- SDM-CSAT3

An Input/Output Instruction that controls and retrieves data from the CSAT3.

The CSAT3 is a three dimensional sonic anemometer with temperature.  Up to 15 CSAT3s can be connected to a datalogger's SDM bus.

Instruction 107 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- SDM Address

•	Parameter 3 -- Options

•	Parameter 4 -- Ux Location


Repetitions

Enter the number of CSAT3s that will be connected to the datalogger.

Up to 15 CSAT3s can be addressed on the SDM bus.  Each CSAT3 must have a consecutive address.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of CSAT3s that will be connected to the datalogger.


SDM Address

Enter the unique SDM Address of the CSAT3 that the datalogger will communicate with.

The hex address must be entered as a base four number (see Addressing Scheme).

The SDM Address is sequentially incremented when the Repetitions option is greater than 1.

Note:   The SDM Address is factory set to 3.  Each CSAT3 on the SDM bus MUST have a unique address.  A hex thumb switch within the electronics box of the CSAT3 is used to assign the SDM address.  The CSAT3 Instruction Manual contains more information on CSAT3 addresses.


SDM Address

Enter the unique SDM Address of the CSAT3 that the datalogger will communicate with.

The hex address must be entered as a base four number.

The SDM Address is sequentially incremented when the Repetitions option is greater than 1.


Datalogger and CSAT3 Addressing Scheme

  CSAT Thumb	     Datalogger

   Switch (Hex)	 Address (base 4)	    Base 10 Value

0	00	  0

1	01	  1

2	02	  2

3	03	  3

4	10	  4

5	11	  5

6	12	  6

7	13	  7

8	20	  8

9	21	  9

A	22	10

B	23	11

C	30	12

D	31	13

E	32	14


Options

Option 0 -- Trigger and Get Wind and c Data

Options 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, & 20 -- Execution Parameter

Option 90 -- Trigger and Get Wind and c Data

Option 91 -- Trigger and Get Wind and Ts Data

Option 92 -- Trigger and Get Wind and (c-340) Data

Option 97 -- Get Wind and (c-340) Data after Group Trigger

Option 98 -- Get Wind and Ts Data after Group Trigger

Option 99 -- Get Wind and c Data after a Group Trigger

Note:   Before the CSAT3 will make measurements, it must first be configured with an Execution Parameter.  The CSAT3 is configured the first time this instruction is scanned (see the CSAT3 manual for programming examples).


Option 0 and 90 -- Trigger and Get Wind and c Data

Sends a measurement trigger to the CSAT3 whose SDM address is specified in parameter 2.

The CSAT3 also sends wind speed and the speed of sound via the SDM bus to the datalogger (see the CSAT3 manual for details of the trigger and data transfer).


Set Execution Parameter

Options 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, and 20 set the execution parameter the first time instruction 107 is scanned (see the CSAT3 manual for programming examples).

The execution parameter informs the CSAT3 of the specific measurement parameters to use.

The reciprocal of the datalogger's Execution Interval (the datalogger's execution frequency) and the CSAT3's Execution Parameter should match as closely as possible (see Execution Parameter Table).  The CSAT3's Execution Parameter should never be greater than the datalogger's execution frequency or wind measurement errors will occur under gusty conditions.


Execution Parameter Table

 	    Execution	    CSAT3

Execution Interval (sec)	Frequency (Hz)  	Execution Par.

0.046875	      21.333	        20

0.0625     	      16.000	        15

0.078125	      12.800	        12

0.09375	      10.667	        10

0.109375 to 0.15625	  9.143 to 6.4	          6

0.171875 to 0.1875	 5.818 to 5.333	          5

0.203125 to 0.328125	 4.923 to 3.047	          3

0.34375 to 0.5	   2.909 to 2	          2

0.515625 to 1	   1.939 to 1	          1


Option 91 -- Trigger and Get Wind and Ts Data

Sends a measurement trigger to the CSAT3 whose SDM address is specified in parameter 2.

The CSAT3 also sends wind speed and the sonically measured virtual temperature via the SDM bus to the datalogger (see the CSAT3 manual for details of the trigger and data transfer).


Option 92 -- Trigger and Get Wind and (c-340) Data

Sends a measurement trigger to the CSAT3 whose SDM address is specified in parameter 2.

The CSAT3 also sends wind speed and the speed of sound minus 340 m/s via the SDM bus to the datalogger (see the CSAT3 manual for details of the trigger and data transfer).


Option 97 -- Get Wind and (c-340) data after a Group Trigger

The datalogger receives wind speed and the speed of sound minus 340 m/s from the CSAT3 that has been specified in parameter 2 without triggering a new CSAT3 measurement.

The SDM-CSAT3 (P107) Instruction must be preceded by the Group Trigger Instruction (P110) to use this option.


Option 98 -- Get Wind and Ts data after a Group Trigger

The datalogger receives wind speed and the sonically measured virtual temperature from the CSAT3 that has been specified in parameter 2 without triggering a new CSAT3 measurement.

The SDM-CSAT3 (P107) Instruction must be preceded by the Group Trigger Instruction (P110) to use this option.


Option 99 -- Get Wind and c data after a Group Trigger

The datalogger receives wind speed and the speed of sound from the CSAT3 that has been specified in parameter 2 without triggering a new CSAT3 measurement.

The SDM-CSAT3 (P107) Instruction must be preceded by the Group Trigger Instruction (P110) to use this option.


Ux Input Location

Enter the input location that will store the first of five data values when option 0, 90, 91, 92, 97, 98, or 99 is chosen for parameter 3.

For more detailed information about input locations, see Input Location Information.

The data stored will be: Ux, Uy, Uz, diagnostic word, and c, Ts, or c-340

Where:

Ux -- the wind speed (m/s) in the x plane defined by the anemometer head.

Uy -- the wind speed (m/s) in the y plane defined by the anemometer head.

Uz -- the wind speed (m/s) in the z plane defined by the anemometer head.

c -- the speed of sound (m/s).

Ts -- the sonically measured virtual temperature (degree Celsius)

c - 340 -- the speed of sound (m/s) minus 340 m/s.

Diagnostic Word -- describes the status of the anemometer (see the CSAT3 manual for details).

If the Repetitions are greater than 1, the number of sequential Input Locations used is Reps * 5.


Instruction 108 -- UDG01

An Input/Output Instruction that measures the distance from the sensor to a surface by using ultrasonic impulses.

Instruction 108 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Address

•	Parameter 2 -- Air Temperature Location

•	Parameter 3 -- Location

•	Parameter 4 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 5 -- Offset


Address

Enter the UDG01's address (factory set at 00).

Note:   Up to 16 addressed devices (UDG01s or SDM peripherals) may be connected to a single CR10X.  Each UDG01 requires a unique address and an individual instruction 108.  Jumpers inside the UDG01 must be moved to change the address (see the UDG01 Instruction Manual for more information).


Air Temperature Input Location

Enter the input location that will hold the air temperature measurement.

Air temperature (degrees Celsius) is used to correct the distance measurement for the speed of sound, which varies with temperature.

For more information about input locations, see Input Location Information.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the UDG01 measurement.

For more information about input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 109 -- SDMX50 Channel Select

An Input/Output Instruction that allows individual multiplexer switches to be activated independently of Instruction 100.

The front panel controls of the 1502B are active while this instruction is used.

Instruction 109 is a convenient method for selecting a particular probe to troubleshoot or to determine the cable length for Instruction 100's parameter 4.

Each multiplexer level requires a separate instruction 109.

Instruction 109 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- SDMX50 Address

•	Parameter 2 -- SDMX50 Channel


SDMX50 Address

Enter the base 4 value of the address.

The available addresses are: 00, 01, 02, 03, 10, 11, 12, 13, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, 31, 32, 33.


SDMX50 Channel

Enter the multiplexer channel (1-8).


Instruction 110 -- SDM-Group Trigger

An Input/Output Instruction that controls SDM devices that support the Group Trigger protocol, including the CSAT3 and CAN-bus.

Up to 15 Group Trigger devices can be connected to a datalogger's SDM bus.  With the SDM Group Trigger (P110), all Group Trigger devices are triggered to make simultaneous measurements.  The data from each device is then retrieved by using the appropriate device specific instruction.

For the CSAT3, this instruction is used when option 97, option 98, or option 99 is chosen for parameter 3 of the SDM-CSAT3 (P107) Instruction.


Instruction 111 -- Run Program From Flash

A Program Control Instruction that loads a program stored in FLASH into RAM.  The program in RAM is replaced by the FLASH program.  Valid program numbers are 1 through 98; however, the actual number of programs which can be stored is limited by the flash memory size.

This instruction has one parameter:    Parameter 1 -- Flash Program Number (Name).

Caution:   The memory allocation must be the same between the program in RAM and the program that is loaded from FLASH or the data in Final Storage will be lost.


Flash Program Number (Name)

Enter the number of the program stored in the datalogger's FLASH memory that will be loaded into RAM.

Index this entry to compile the program without resetting input storage, flags, or ports (*6 mode).  Also see Indexing Parameters.


Flash Program Number (Name)

Enter the number of the program stored in the datalogger's FLASH memory that will be loaded into RAM.

Index this entry to compile the program without resetting input storage, flags, or ports (*6 mode).


Instruction 112 -- Software Reset

An Input/Output Instruction that is used during CSI's production only.

Caution:   This instruction erases all data in final storage and FLASH programs and sets memory allocations to the default values.


Reset Code

Enter the correct code of 9876 to reset the software.

Caution:   This instruction is used exclusively by CSI production.  It erases all data in final storage and FLASH programs and sets memory allocations to the default values.


Instruction 113 -- SDM-SIO4

An Input/Output Instruction that allows the datalogger to communicate with the SDM-SIO4 serial input multiplexer.

Instruction 113 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Address

•	Parameter 3 -- Mode

•	Parameter 4 -- Command

•	Parameter 5 -- 1st Parameters

•	Parameter 6 -- 2nd Parameters

•	Parameter 7 -- Values per Rep

•	Parameter 8 -- Starting Input Location

•	Parameter 9 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 10 -- Offset

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Repetitions

Enter the number of SDM-SIO4s connected to the datalogger.  Each SDM must have a consecutive address.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of SDM-SIO4s connected to the datalogger.  Each SDM must have a consecutive address.


Address

Enter the SDM-SIO4 address (factory set at 00).  Each SDM-SIO4 must have a unique address.

Repetitions must have consecutive addresses.


Mode

Defines the port(s) that is affected by this instruction.


Command

Enter a number from 0 to 9999.  See the SDM-SIO4 manual for more information.


1st Parameters

Enter a number from 0 to 9999.  See the SDM-SIO4 manual for more information.


2nd Parameters

Enter a number from 0 to 9999.  See the SDM-SIO4 manual for more information.


Values per Rep

See the SDM-SIO4 manual for information.


Location

Enter the input location which will store the first measurements.

For more information about input locations, see Input Location Information.

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Instruction 114 -- Set Real Time Clock

An Input/Output Instruction that allows the lithium-backed clock to be set from the values that are contained in input locations.

Instruction 114 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Option Code

•	Parameter 2 -- Input Location


Option Code

Code	Description

   0	set time with hr, min, sec using 3 input locations.

   1	set time with day, hr, min, sec using 4 input locations.

   2	set time with yr, day, hr, min, sec using 5 input locations.


Location

Enter the first input location that contains the value that will set the clock.

For more information about input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 115 -- Set SDM Clock

An Input/Output Instruction that sets the SDM communication rate to the value entered in parameter 1.

This may be necessary when communicating over longer cable lengths.  The default bit period is 10 microseconds.

Note:   Instruction 100 and Instruction 113 automatically adjust the SDM communication rate to the fastest that will work.


Bit period

Enter in 10 microseconds units.  A 0 or 1 entry results in a 10 microseconds bit period.


Instruction 116 -- Generic SDM

An Input/Output Instruction that allows the datalogger to communicate with generic SDMs.

Instruction 116 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Address

•	Parameter 3 -- Command Byte

•	Parameter 4 -- Command

•	Parameter 5 -- Command

•	Parameter 6 -- Command

•	Parameter 7 -- Command

•	Parameter 8 -- Command

•	Parameter 9 -- Command

•	Parameter 10 -- Drop Code

•	Parameter 11 -- Delay between Bits

•	Parameter 12 -- Delay between Bytes

•	Parameter 13 -- Bytes per Command

•	Parameter 14 -- Transmit/Receive Bytes

•	Parameter 15 -- Values per Rep

•	Parameter 16 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 17 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 18 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of SDMs connected to the datalogger.  Each SDM must have a consecutive address.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of SDMs connected to the datalogger.  Each SDM must have a consecutive address.


Address

Enter the SDM address; each SDM must have a unique address.

Repetitions must have consecutive addresses.


Command byte

Contact Campbell Scientific for information.


Command

Index this entry to send.  Contact Campbell Scientific for more information.


Command

Index this entry to send.  Contact Campbell Scientific for more information.


Command

Index this entry to send.  Contact Campbell Scientific for more information.


Command

Index this entry to send.  Contact Campbell Scientific for more information.


Command

Index this entry to send.  Contact Campbell Scientific for more information.


Command

Index this entry to send.  Contact Campbell Scientific for more information.


Drop Code

Code	Description

   0	Drop C2 & C3 at end

   1	DO NOT drop C2 & C3 at end


Delay between bits

Enter in 1/154 ms units.


Delay between bytes

Enter in 100 microsecond units.


Bytes per Command

Enter a 4 for CSI float.  Contact Campbell Scientific for more information.


Transmit/Receive

Enter the number of bytes transmitted or received.  Contact Campbell Scientific for more information.


Values per Rep

Enter the number of values used for each repetition.  Contact Campbell Scientific for more information.


Location

Enter the first input location that will store the measurements.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 117 -- Read ID

An Input/Output Instruction that stores the datalogger's ID in an input location (parameter 1).

Instruction 117 allows the ID to be sampled (Instruction 70) and output as part of the data stream.  This is especially useful when the user is retrieving data from several dataloggers.


Input Location

Enter the input location that will store the datalogger ID.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 118 -- SDM-CAN

An Input/Output Instruction that is used to configure and control Campbell Scientific's SDM-CAN interface.  This interface is used to communicate directly with a CAN-bus network.

Multiple Instruction 118s may be used within a program.  The initial function of the instruction is to configure the SDM-CAN interface when the datalogger program is compiled.  Subsequent instructions can be used to determine what data is passed between the CAN-bus network and the datalogger, set and/or read the SDM-CAN's internal switches, and read and/or reset detected errors.

The SDM-CAN can be configured to notify the datalogger when new data is available by setting a control port high.  This allows data to be stored in input locations in the datalogger faster than the program execution interval.  This interrupt function is enabled by indexing Parameter 10.  Refer to the SDM-CAN manual for additional information.

The SDM Group Trigger Instruction (Instruction 110) can be used to trigger simultaneous measurements from one or more SDM-CANs and other SDM devices connected to the datalogger.  When Instruction 110 is encountered in a program, it broadcasts a special SDM message which causes all the SDM-CAN devices to copy the last data values captured from the CAN-bus into the working data buffers.  Refer to the SDM-CAN manual and Instruction 110 for additional help.

Instruction 118 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- SDM Address

•	Parameter 2 -- Time Quanta

•	Parameter 3 -- TSEG1

•	Parameter 4 -- TSEG2

•	Parameter 5 -- ID (Bits 0 - 10)

•	Parameter 6 -- ID (Bits 11 - 23)

•	Parameter 7 -- ID (Bits 24 - 28)

•	Parameter 8 -- Data Types

•	Parameter 9 -- Start Bit

•	Parameter 10 -- No. of Bits

•	Parameter 11 -- No. of Values

•	Parameter 12 -- Location

•	Parameter 13 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 14 -- Offset

Note:  Depending on the function of Instruction 118, some parameters might be irrelevant.  Unused parameters should be set to 00.


SDM Address

Enter the address for the SDM-CAN interface.  The address must match the switch setting for the device.  Each interface connected to the CAN-bus must have a unique address.

The address must be entered as a Base 4 number.  The Base 4 address for each switch position is listed below:

    Switch	 Datalogger

Setting (Hex)	 Address (base 4)

0	00

1	01

2	02

3	03

4	10

5	11

6	12

7	13

8	20

9	21

A	22

B	23

C	30

D	31

E	32

F	33


Time Quanta

Three time segments are used to set the bit rate and other timing parameters for the CAN-bus network.  These parameters are entered as integer numbers.

The relationship between the three time segments (TQUANTA, TSEG1, and TSEG2) is defined as:

tbit = tq + tTSEG1 + tTSEG2

The first time segment, the synchronization segment (S-SG), is defined by the TQUANTA parameter.  To calculate a suitable value for TQUANTA, use the following equation:

TQUANTA = tq * 8 * 10^6

where

tq =	the Time Quanta.  There are between 8 and 25 time quanta in the bit time. The bit time is defined as 1/baud rate.

Note:   If more than one Instruction 118 is used within a datalogger program, the values used for TQUANTA, TSEG1 and TSEG2 must be the same for each instruction.


TSEG1

Three time segments are used to set the bit rate and other timing parameters for the CAN-bus network.  These parameters are entered as integer numbers.

The relationship between the three time segments (TQUANTA, TSEG1, and TSEG2) is defined as:

tbit = tq + tTSEG1 + tTSEG2

The second time segment (TSEG1) is actually two time segments known as the propagation segment and phase segment one.  The value entered is determined by the characteristics of the network and the other devices on the network.  It can be calculated as:

TSEG1 = tTSEG1 / tq

The relative values of TSEG1 and TSEG2 determine when the SDM-CAN samples the data bit.

Note:   If more than one Instruction 118 is used within a datalogger program, the values used for TQUANTA, TSEG1 and TSEG2 must be the same for each instruction.


TSEG2

Three time segments are used to set the bit rate and other timing parameters for the CAN-bus network.  These parameters are entered as integer numbers.

The relationship between the three time segments (TQUANTA, TSEG1, and TSEG2) is defined as:

tbit = tq + tTSEG1 + tTSEG2

The third time segment, the phase segment two (TSEG2), is defined by the TSEG2 parameter.  The value of TSEG2 can be calculated using the equation:

TSEG2 = tTSEG2 / tq

The relative values of TSEG1 and TSEG2 determine when the SDM-CAN samples the data bit.

Note:   If more than one Instruction 118 is used within a datalogger program, the values used for TQUANTA, TSEG1 and TSEG2 must be the same for each instruction.


ID (Bits 0 -- 10)

Each device on a CAN-bus network prefaces its data frames with an 11 or 29 bit identifier.  This parameter is used to set bits 0 through 10.  Valid entries are numbers between 0 and 2047.

Two additional parameters (Parameter 6  and Parameter 7) are used to specify 29 bit ID numbers, since a 29 bit number is too large to be defined using only one parameter.  If an 11 bit identifier is used, index this parameter to direct the datalogger to ignore parameters 6 and 7 (for information about indexing parameters, see Indexing Parameters).


ID (Bits 0 -- 10)

Each device on a CAN-bus network prefaces its data frames with an 11 or 29 bit identifier.  This parameter is used to set bits 0 through 10.  Valid entries are numbers between 0 and 2047.

Two additional parameters (Parameter 6 and Parameter 7) are used to specify 29 bit ID numbers, since a 29 bit number is too large to be defined using only one parameter.  If an 11 bit identifier is used, index this parameter to direct the datalogger to ignore parameters 6 and 7.


ID (Bits 11 -- 23)

Each device on a CAN-bus network prefaces its data frames with an 11 or 29 bit identifier.  This parameter is used to set bits 11 through 23.  Valid entries are numbers between 0 and 8191.

If an 11 bit identifier is used, this parameter should be left at 0 and Parameter 5 should be indexed.


ID (Bits 11 -- 23)

Each device on a CAN-bus network prefaces its data frames with an 11 or 29 bit identifier.  This parameter is used to set bits 11 through 23.  Valid entries are numbers between 0 and 8191.

If an 11 bit identifier is used, this parameter should be left at 0 and Parameter 5 should be indexed.


ID (Bits 24 -- 28)

Each device on a CAN-bus network prefaces its data frames with an 11 or 29 bit identifier.  This parameter is used to set bits 24 through 28.  Valid entries are numbers between 0 and 31.

If an 11 bit identifier is used, this parameter should be left at 0 and Parameter 5 should be indexed.


ID (Bits 24 -- 28)

Each device on a CAN-bus network prefaces its data frames with an 11 or 29 bit identifier.  This parameter is used to set bits 24 through 28.  Valid entries are numbers between 0 and 31.

If an 11 bit identifier is used, this parameter should be left at 0 and Parameter 5 should be indexed.


Data Type

Defines what function the Instruction 118 will perform.  This instruction can be used to collect data, buffer data for transmission to the CAN-bus, transmit data to the CAN-bus, read or reset error counters, read the status of the SDM-CAN, read the SDM-CAN's OS signature and version, send a remote frame, or read or set the SDM-CAN's internal switches.

Parameter

Value	Description

1	Retrieve data; unsigned integer, most significant byte first

2	Retrieve data; unsigned integer, least significant byte first

3	Retrieve data; signed integer, most significant byte first

4	Retrieve data; signed integer, least significant byte first

5	Retrieve data; 4-byte IEEE floating point number; most significant byte first

6	Retrieve data; 4-byte IEEE floating point number; least significant byte first

7	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; unsigned integer, most significant byte first. Overwrite existing data.

8	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; unsigned integer, least significant byte first. Overwrite existing data.

9	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; signed integer, most significant byte first. Overwrite existing data.

10	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; signed integer, least significant byte first. Overwrite existing data.

11	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; 4-byte IEEE floating point number; most significant byte first. Overwrite existing data.

12	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; 4-byte IEEE floating point number; least significant byte first. Overwrite existing data.

13	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; unsigned integer, most significant byte first. Logical "OR" with existing data.

14	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; unsigned integer, least significant byte first. Logical "OR" with existing data.

15	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; signed integer, most significant byte first. Logical "OR" with existing data.

16	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; signed integer, least significant byte first. Logical "OR" with existing data.

17	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; 4-byte IEEE floating point number; most significant byte first. Logical "OR" with existing data.

18	Build data frame in SDM-CAN memory; 4-byte IEEE floating point number; least significant byte first. Logical "OR" with existing data.

19	Transmit data value to the CAN-bus; unsigned integer, most significant byte first.

20	Transmit data value to the CAN-bus; unsigned integer, least significant byte first.

21	Transmit data value to the CAN-bus; signed integer, most significant byte first.

22	Transmit data value to the CAN-bus; signed integer, least significant byte first.

23	Transmit data value to the CAN-bus; 4-byte IEEE floating point number; most significant byte first.

24	Transmit data value to the CAN-bus; 4-byte IEEE floating point number; least significant byte first.

25	Transmit previously built data frame to the CAN-bus.

26	Set up previously built data frame as a Remote Frame Response.

27	Read Transmit, Receive, Overrun, and Watchdog errors; errors are placed in 4 consecutive input locations beginning with the location specified in parameter 12.

28	Read Transmit, Receive, Overrun, and Watchdog errors; errors are placed in 4 consecutive input locations beginning with the location specified in parameter 12. Reset error counters to 0 after reading.

29	Read SDM-CAN status; result is placed into the input location specified in parameter 12::

Status	Description

0000	The SDM-CAN is involved in bus activities; error counters are less than 96.

0001	The SDM-CAN is involved in bus activities; one or more error counters is greater than or equal to 96.

0002	The SDM-CAN is not involved in bus activities; error counters are less than 96.

0003	The SDM-CAN is not involved in bus activities; one or more error counters is greater than or equal to 96.

30	Read SDM-CAN operating system and version number; results are placed in two consecutive input locations beginning with the input location specified in parameter 12.

31	Send Remote Frame Request.

32	Set SDM-CAN's internal switches.  The code is stored in the input location specified in parameter 12 and is entered in the form of ABCD.

Switch	Code	Description

A	0	Currently not used; set to 0.

B	0	SDM-CAN returns the last value captured from the network, even if that value has been read before (default).

1	SDM-CAN returns -99999 if a data value is requested by the datalogger and a new value has not been captured from the network since the last request.

2-9	Currently not used.

C	0	Disable I/O interrupts (default).

1	Enable I/O interrupts, pulsed mode.

2	Enable I/O interrupts, fast mode.

3-7	Currently not used.

8	Place the SDM-CAN into low power stand-by mode.

9	Leave switch setting unchanged.

D	0	Listen only (error passive) mode. CAN transmissions are not confirmed.

1	Transmit once. Data will not be retransmitted in case of error or loss of arbitration. Frames received without error are acknowledged.

2	Self-reception. A frame transmitted from the SDM-CAN that was acknowledged by an external node will also be received by the SDM-CAN but no retransmission will occur in the event of loss of arbitration or error. Frames received correctly from an external node are acknowledged.

3	Normal, retransmission will occur in the event of loss of arbitration or error. Frames received correctly from an external node are acknowledged. This is the typical setting to use if the SDM-CAN is to be used to transmit data.

4	Transmit once; self-test. The SDM-CAN will  perform a successful transmission even if there is no acknowledgment from an external CAN node. Frames received correctly from an external node are acknowledged.

5	Self-reception; self -test. The SDM-CAN will  perform a successful transmission even if there is no acknowledgment from an external CAN node. Frames received correctly from an external node are acknowledged. SDM-CAN will receive its own transmission.

6	Normal; self-test. The SDM-CAN will perform a successful transmission even if there is no acknowledgment from an external CAN node. Frames received correctly from an external node are acknowledged.

7	Not defined.

8	Not defined.

9	Leave switch setting unchanged.

33	Read SDM-CAN's internal switches.  Place results in the input location specified in parameter 12.

Note:  Because of the datalogger's internal storage format, the maximum length of integer that can be stored in one input location is 16 bits.  For longer integers, store several shorter integers in several input locations then combine the shorter integers after the data has been transferred to the computer.


Start Bit

This parameter is used to identify the least significant bit of the data value within the CAN data frame to which the instruction relates.  The bit number can range from 1 to 64 (there are 64 bits in a CAN data frame).  The SDM-CAN adheres to the ISO standard where the least significant bit is referenced to the right most bit of the data frame.  If this parameter is indexed, the least significant bit is referenced to the left most bit of the data frame.


Number of Bits

This parameter is used to specify the number of bits that will be used in a transaction.  The number can range from 1 to 64 (there are 64 bits in a CAN data frame).

The SDM-CAN can be configured to notify the datalogger when new data is available by setting a control port high.  This allows data to be stored in input locations in the datalogger faster than the program execution interval.  This interrupt function is enabled by indexing this parameter (for information about indexing parameters, see Indexing Parameters).  Refer to the SDM-CAN manual for additional information.

Note: This parameter may be overridden by a fixed number of bits, depending upon the data type selected.


Number of Bits

This parameter is used to specify the number of bits that will be used in a transaction.  The number can range from 1 to 64 (there are 64 bits in a CAN data frame).

The SDM-CAN can be configured to notify the datalogger when new data is available by setting a control port high.  This allows data to be stored in input locations in the datalogger faster than the program execution interval.  This interrupt function is enabled by indexing this parameter.  Refer to the SDM-CAN manual for additional information.

Note: This parameter may be overridden by a fixed number of bits, depending upon the data type selected.


Number of Values

This parameter defines the number of values (beginning with the value stored in the input location specified in parameter 12) that will be transferred to or from the datalogger during one operation.  For each value transferred, the Number of Bits (specified in Parameter 10) will be added to the Start Bit number (parameter 9) so that multiple values can be read from or stored to one data frame.


Number of Values

This parameter defines the number of values (beginning with the value stored in the input location specified in parameter 12) that will be transferred to or from the datalogger during one operation.  For each value transferred, the Number of Bits (specified in Parameter 10) will be added to the Start Bit number (parameter 9) so that multiple values can be read from or stored to one data frame.


Location

Enter the first input location in which data should be stored.  The type of information and the number of values stored depend on the Data Type chosen in parameter 8.

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 119 -- TDR100 Measurement

An Input/Output Instruction for Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) measurements using the TDR100.

The TDR100 is controlled by a datalogger using Instruction 119 and Synchronous Devices for Measurement (SDM) protocol.  SDMX50 multiplexers are also connected through the SDM control lines, and parameters in Instruction 119 determine multiplexer channel selection.  At least one Instruction 119 is required for each SDMX50.

Instruction 119 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- SDM Address

•	Parameter 2 -- Output Options

•	Parameter 3 -- MMMP Mux and Probe Selection

•	Parameter 4 -- Waveform Averaging

•	Parameter 5 -- Vp

•	Parameter 6 -- Points

•	Parameter 7 -- Cable Length (meters)

•	Parameter 8 -- Window Length (meters)

•	Parameter 9 -- Probe Length (meters)

•	Parameter 10 -- Probe Offset (meters)

•	Parameter 11 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 12 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 13 -- Offset

Note:   This instruction requires manual input storage allocation when waveforms are collected.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


SDM1502 Address

Enter a base four number that corresponds with the hardware-selected hexidecimal value on the top panel of the TDR100.


Output Options

Option Code	Description

0	Measure La/L (ratio of apparent to physical probe rod length)

1	Collect Waveform values

2	Collect Waveform plus First Derivative

3	Measure Electrical Conductivity

Note:   This instruction requires manual input storage allocation when waveforms are collected.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Option 1 -- Collect Waveform

Outputs reflection waveform values as an array of floating point numbers with a range of -1 to 1.  The waveform values are prefaced by a header containing values of key parameters for this instruction.

The number of data points used in the waveform is selected with parameter 6 (Points).  Generally, 250 spatial increments provide adequate resolution for most waveform analysis algorithms.  A higher number of points requires more memory usage and lengthens communication time between the TDR100 and datalogger.  The first waveform element corresponds to zero; therefore the value entered in parameter 6 is the number of spatial increments plus one (e.g., 250 spatial increments requires an entry of 251 for parameter 6).

The waveform data will commence at the distance from the TDR100 panel connector specified in parameter 7 (Cable Length).  The correct value depends on the setting for propagation velocity (Vp).  See the TDR100 operating manual for guidance in selecting the correct value.

The waveform spans the length specified in parameter 8 (Window Length).

The first input location is designated in parameter 11.  Additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  Since the first 9 elements of the waveform data are header information, the minimum number of input locations allocated must be the number of data points entered in parameter 6 plus 9 (e.g., if you enter 251 for parameter 6 then 260 input locations need to be allocated).  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.

Description of Array Header Elements:

Header

Element	Description

1	averaging

2	propagation velocity

3	points

4	cable length

5	window length

6	probe rod length

7	probe correction factor

8	multiplier

9	offset


Option 2 -- Collect Waveform plus First Derivative

Returns (2*n-5)+9 values where n is the number of waveform reflection values specified in parameter 6.

The first n values are the same as Output Option 1; the latter n-5 values are the first derivative of the waveform.  For example, if 250 waveform reflection values are specified in parameter 6, the total array length is 504.  The first 9 elements of the waveform data are header information; the next 250 are waveform reflection values and the last 245 are the first derivative of waveform reflection values.


Option 3 -- Electrical Conductivity

Outputs a value that when multiplied by the probe constant determines soil bulk electrical conductivity in S/m.

The probe constant or a multiple of the probe constant can be entered in parameter 12 (Multiplier).


MMMP Mux and Probe Selection

Use the following addressing scheme to define the way the probes are connected to the TDR100 (see Examples).

Addressing scheme:  ABCR

Where:

A -- Level 1 multiplexer channel

B -- Level 2 multiplexer channel

C -- Level 3 multiplexer channel

R -- the number of consecutive probes to be read, starting with the channel specified by the ABC value (maximum of 8).

Note:   enter a 0 when a level is not used.


MMMP Mux and Probe Selection

Use the following addressing scheme to define the way the probes are connected to the TDR100.

Addressing scheme:  ABCR

Where:

A -- Level 1 multiplexer channel

B -- Level 2 multiplexer channel

C -- Level 3 multiplexer channel

R -- the number of consecutive probes to be read, starting with the channel specified by the ABC value (maximum of 8).

Note:   enter a 0 when a level is not used.


Waveform Averaging

Number of waveform reflections averaged by the TDR100 to give a single result.  A waveform averaging value of 4 provides good signal-to-noise ratio under typical applications.  Under high noise conditions averaging can be increased. The maximum averaging possible is 128.


Vp (Propagation Velocity)

Propagation Velocity (Vp) = value * (speed of light)/100.

Vp adjustment is not necessary for soil water content or electrical conductivity measurement and should be set to 1.0.

Specific Vp values for types of coaxial cable are available from manufacturer data books.  It is only necessary to know the Vp value if the TDR100 is used as a cable tester for finding cable lengths or faults.


Points

Enter the number of points in the displayed or collected waveform (20 to 2048).  A value of 250 is recommended for soil water measurements.  The waveform consists of the number of points specified equally spaced over the window length specified in parameter 8.


Cable Length (meters)

If a 1 or 2 is entered in parameter 2 to collect waveform data, cable length is the distance to the start of the collected waveform.  The collected waveform will cover the length specified in parameter 8, Window Length.

If a 0 is entered in parameter 2 to determine La/L, cable length is used by the analysis algorithm to begin searching for the TDR probe.  The Window Length value entered in parameter 8 must be large enough to contain the entire probe reflection.  For a TDR probe with 20 cm or 30 cm rods, a Window Length of 5 meters is adequate.

The value used for Cable Length is best determined using PCTDR100 with the Vp = 1.0.  Adjust the Cable Length and Window Length values in PCTDR100 until the probe reflection can be viewed.  Subtract about 0.5 meters from the distance associated with the beginning of the probe reflection.

Note:   The cable length specified in this parameter applies to all probes selected by this Instruction 119; therefore, all probes MUST have the same cable lengths.


Cable Length (meters)

If a 1 or 2 is entered in parameter 2 to collect waveform data, cable length is the distance to the start of the collected waveform.  The collected waveform will cover the length specified in parameter 8, Window Length.

If a 0 is entered in parameter 2 to determine La/L, cable length is used by the analysis algorithm to begin searching for the TDR probe.  The Window Length value entered in parameter 8 must be large enough to contain the entire probe reflection.  For a TDR probe with 20 cm or 30 cm rods, a Window Length of 5 meters is adequate.

The value used for Cable Length is best determined using PCTDR100 with the Vp = 1.0.  Adjust the Cable Length and Window Length values in PCTDR100 until the probe reflection can be viewed.  Subtract about 0.5 meters from the distance associated with the beginning of the probe reflection.

Note:   The cable length specified in this parameter applies to all probes selected by this Instruction 119; therefore, all probes MUST have the same cable lengths.


Window Length (meters)

Enter the length, in meters, of the waveform to collect or analyze.  The waveform begins at the cable length (parameter 2) and ends at the cable length + window length.  This is an apparent length because the value set for Vp may not be the actual propagation velocity.  For water content measurements, the window length must be large enough to contain the entire probe reflection for probes with 20 to 30 cm rods.  Vp = 1 and window length = 5 is recommended.


Probe Length (meters)

Enter the length of the probe rods that are exposed to the medium being measured.  The value of this parameter only has an affect on output option 0, La/L.


Probe Offset (meters)

An apparent length value used to correct for the portion of the probe rods that may be encapsulated in epoxy and not surrounded by soil or other medium being measured.  This value is supplied by Campbell Scientific for the probes we manufacture.  Contact us for guidance for determining this value when other TDR probes are used.  The value of this parameter only has an affect on output option 0, La/L.


Input Location

Enter the input location that will store the results.

Note:   If the Output Option is a waveform, this location will store the first data point; consecutive locations, which must be manually allocated, will store the remaining values (see Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog).

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Multiplier

Enter a multiplication factor that will be applied to La/L and stored in the input location specified in parameter 6.  Set to 1 when parameter 2 is option 1 or 2.  For electrical conductivity, this parameter can be used for a probe constant value.


Offset

Enter an offset value that will be added to La/L and stored in the input location specified in parameter 6.  Set to 0 when parameter 2 is option 1 or 2.


Instruction 120 -- Data Transfer to TGT

A Program Control Instruction that transfers the final storage data to the TGT1 transmitter's buffer, designates locations for the forward and reflected power, and automatically compares the datalogger clock with the transmitter's.

The TGT1 transmitter supports one-way communications via the GOES satellite system.

Instruction 120 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Buffer Selection

•	Parameter 2 -- Forward/Reflected Power Location


Buffer Selection

Code	Description

0	binary mode, self-timed buffer, appends the new data to the old

1	binary mode, self-timed buffer, writes over the old data

10	binary mode, random buffer, appends the new data to the old

11	binary mode, random buffer, writes over the old data

100	ASCII mode, self-timed buffer, appends the new data to the old

101	ASCII mode, self-timed buffer, writes over the old data

110	ASCII mode, random buffer, appends the new data to the old

111	ASCII mode, random buffer, writes over the old data

200	18-bit, high resolution, self-timed buffer, appends the new data to the old

201	18-bit, high resolution, self-timed buffer, writes over the old data

210	18-bit, high resolution, random buffer, appends the new data to the old

211	18-bit, high resolution, random buffer, writes over the old data

Notes:

•	The binary mode has 3-bytes per data point.

•	The ASCII mode has 7-bytes per data point.

•	The 18-bit mode has 3-bytes per data point.

•	The 18-bit mode requires all of the final storage data to be stored in the high resolution format.  Since Instruction 77, Real Time, can be stored in low resolution only, it must first be copied to an input location and then output in the high resolution format.

•	In the 18-bit mode, all numbers to right of the decimal are truncated when the data is sent to the transmitter (the data stored in the datalogger remains unchanged).

•	For more information about the buffers, see transmitter's buffer.


FWD/REF Power Location

Enter the starting input location that will store the forward power reading.  The next consecutive location will automatically store the reflected power reading.  If you enter a 0 for this parameter, the values for forward and reflected power will not be saved in an input location.

For more information about forward and reflected power, see forward and reflected power.

Example:   When the location number of this entry is 10, the forward power will be stored in input location number 10 and the reflected power will be stored in input location number 11.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Forward and Reflected Power

The forward and reflected power are measured (in decimal units) and updated during each transmission.

The forward power must be within the 165 to 215 range for the transmitter's output level to be within specifications.

The antenna/cable assembly is operating properly when the percent of power reflected is less than 5.  This percentage can be estimated with the following equation:

 % power reflected = [((ref + 17.4)/(fwd + 17.4))^2 x 100] - 1

When the percent of power reflected is greater than or equal to 5, one or more of the following situations exist and must be corrected to avoid losing data:

•	The antenna is not connected.

•	The antenna is too close to metal.

•	The user is transmitting inside a building.

•	The antenna is covered with snow or ice.

•	The frequency that the antenna is tuned to doesn't match the transmitter's frequency.

•	There is a problem with the coaxial cable connector/connection.

•	There is a problem with the antenna cable.


Self-timed and Random Buffers

The TGT1 has two buffers.  One buffer stores the self-timed data; the other stores the random.

Self-timed data are transmitted only during a predetermined time frame.  The self-timed data are erased from the transmitter's buffer after each transmission.

Random data are transmitted immediately after a threshold has been exceeded.  The transmission is then randomly repeated to assure it is received.


Instruction 121 -- Data Transfer of ARGOS ST-13

A Program Control Instruction that sends data via the Telonics ST-13 transmitter and the Argos satellite system.

Instruction 121 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Command Byte #1

•	Parameter 2 -- Command Byte #2

•	Parameter 3 -- Command Byte #3

This instruction outputs the command bytes and all of the data in the active final storage area.


Command Byte #1

Enter the decimal representation of command byte #1.

Note:   The value and function of these command bytes are described in the Telonics ST-13 Asynchronous Serial User's Guide.  The Telonics ST-13 Asynchronous Serial User's Guide lists the commands as binary values; the commands must be converted to decimal.


Command Byte #2

Enter the decimal representation of command byte #2.

Note:   The value and function of these command bytes are described in the Telonics ST-13 Asynchronous Serial User's Guide.  The Telonics ST-13 Asynchronous Serial User's Guide lists the commands as binary values; the commands must be converted to decimal.


Command Byte #3

Enter the decimal representation of command byte #3.

Note:   The value and function of these command bytes are described in the Telonics ST-13 Asynchronous Serial User's Guide.  The Telonics ST-13 Asynchronous Serial User's Guide lists the commands as binary values; the commands must be converted to decimal.


Instruction 122 -- Inmarsat-C Data Transfer

A Program Control Instruction that supports communications with the Galaxy transceiver via the Inmarsat-C satellite system.

Instruction 122 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Options

•	Parameter 2 -- Data Network ID

•	Parameter 3 -- Land Earth Station


Options

0	transfer the data from final storage to the satellite transceiver.  Only new data from the active final storage area is transferred.  The satellite transceiver immediately initiates the data transmission process.

1	set the CR10X's clock to the Galaxy's GPS clock when the CR10X's time differs more than + 3 seconds.

2	check for mail messages.  Messages can be sent via satellite to the datalogger.  The format of the message is:   CR10 x:y  CR10 x:y

Where x is the input location to load with the value y.  The message is sent twice as a means of error checking the transmission.

The valid range for x is 1 through 9; the valid range for y is 0 through 9.  Messages are sent through the Land Earth Station.  If a message does not meet the specified format, the message will be ignored by the datalogger.

Note:   When using Option 2, the input location for the transmitted message must be manually allocated by using the Toggle Manual feature in the Input Location Editor.


Data Network ID (DNID)

Enter the Data Network ID number that was assigned to you by your Land Earth Station.

The DNID is used for Group Data Reporting purposes.


Land Earth Station (LES)

Enter the number that identifies the Land Earth Station where you are registered.


Instruction 123 -- Automatic Setup of TGT1

A Program Control Instruction that defines the transmitter's address, the transmission intervals, and the uplink channels.

The TGT1 transmitter supports one-way communications via the GOES satellite system.

Instruction 123 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Address

•	Parameter 2 -- Address

•	Parameter 3 -- Address

•	Parameter 4 -- Address

•	Parameter 5 -- Address

•	Parameter 6 -- Address

•	Parameter 7 -- Address

•	Parameter 8 -- Address

•	Parameter 9 -- Self-Timed Uplink Channel

•	Parameter 10 -- Random Uplink Channel

•	Parameter 11 -- Self-Timed Interval (Days)

•	Parameter 12 -- Self-Timed Interval (Hours)

•	Parameter 13 -- Self-Timed Interval (Minutes)

•	Parameter 14 -- Self-Timed Interval (Seconds)

•	Parameter 15 -- Random Interval (Hours)

•	Parameter 16 -- Random Interval (Minutes)

•	Parameter 17 -- Random Interval (Seconds)

•	Parameter 18 -- Initial Self-Timed Transmission (Hours)

•	Parameter 19 -- Initial Self-Timed Transmission (Minutes)

•	Parameter 20 -- Initial Self-Timed Transmission (Seconds)

•	Parameter 21 -- Transmit Window Length

•	Parameter 22 -- Preamble

•	Parameter 23 -- Buffer


Address

Enter the first digit of the NESDIS-assigned address.

Convert the letters in the address to their decimal equivalent.


Address

Enter the second digit of the NESDIS-assigned address.

Convert the letters in the address to their decimal equivalent.


Address

Enter the third digit of the NESDIS-assigned address.

Convert the letters in the address to their decimal equivalent.


Address

Enter the fourth digit of the NESDIS-assigned address.

Convert the letters in the address to their decimal equivalent.


Address

Enter the fifth digit of the NESDIS-assigned address.

Convert the letters in the address to their decimal equivalent.


Address

Enter the sixth digit of the NESDIS-assigned address.

Convert the letters in the address to their decimal equivalent.


Address

Enter the seventh digit of the NESDIS-assigned address.

Convert the letters in the address to their decimal equivalent.


Address

Enter the eighth digit of the NESDIS-assigned address.

Convert the letters in the address to their decimal equivalent.


Self-Timed Uplink Channel

Enter the NESDIS-assigned self-timed uplink channel.  If not assigned a self-timed channel, type in zeros.


Random Uplink Channel

Enter the NESDIS-assigned random uplink channel.  If not assigned a random channel, type in zeros.


Self-Timed Transmission Interval (Days)

Enter the days portion of the NESDIS-assigned self-timed transmission interval.

Note:  This is a 24-hour format.  Valid entries are 0 through 30.


Self-Timed Transmission Interval (Hours)

Enter the hours portion of the NESDIS-assigned self-timed transmission interval.

Note:   This is a 24-hour format.  Valid entries are 0 through 23.


Self-Timed Transmission Interval (Minutes)

Enter the minutes portion of the NESDIS-assigned self-timed transmission interval.

Note:   This is a 24-hour format.  Valid entries are 0 through 59.


Self-Timed Transmission Interval (Seconds)

Enter the seconds portion of the NESDIS-assigned self-timed transmission interval.

Note:   This is a 24-hour format.  Valid entries are 0 through 59.


Random Transmission Interval (hours)

Enter the hours portion of the NESDIS-assigned random transmission interval.

Note:  This is a 24-hour format.  Valid entries are 0 through 23.


Random Transmission Interval (minutes)

Enter the minutes portion of the NESDIS-assigned random transmission interval.

Note:  This is a 24-hour format.  Valid entries are 0 through 59.


Random Transmission Interval (seconds)

Enter the seconds portion of the NESDIS-assigned random transmission interval.

Note:  This is a 24-hour format.  Valid entries are 0 through 59.


Initial Self-Timed Transmission (Hours)

Enter the hours portion of the initial self-timed transmission.

Note:  This is a 24-hour format.  Valid entries are 0 through 23.


Initial Self-Timed Transmission (Minutes)

Enter the minutes portion of the initial self-timed transmission.

Note:  This is a 24-hour format.  Valid entries are 0 through 59.


Initial Self-Timed Transmission (Seconds)

Enter the seconds portion of the initial self-timed transmission.

Note:  This is a 24-hour format.  Valid entries are 0 through 59.


Assigned Transmission Window

Option	Description

0	1 minute window

1	2 minute window


Transmission Preamble

Option	Description

0	short preamble (0.98 seconds)

4	long preamble (7.3 seconds)


Buffer

Option	Description

1	self-timed buffer

2	random buffer

3	both buffers

Note:  These buffers must match the buffers designated in parameter 1 of Instruction 120.


Instruction 124 -- Fire Weather Data Transfer to TGT

A Program Control Instruction that transfers the final storage data to the TGT1 transmitter's buffer, designates locations for the forward and reflected power, and automatically compares the datalogger clock with the transmitter's.  Output is formatted to meet the standards set by NIFC for Fire Weather Data.  Format takes place during transfer to the TGT-1 satellite transmitter; data stored in the datalogger remains in the standard datalogger format.

The TGT1 transmitter supports one-way communications via the GOES satellite system.

Instruction 124 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Fire Weather Format

•	Parameter 2 -- Buffer Control

•	Parameter 3 -- Forward/Reflected Power Location


Fire Weather Format

0	RAWS 7 output

1	xxx.x ASCII output

2	xx.xx ASCII output

3	x.xxx ASCII output

4	xxx ASCII output

5	xxxxx ASCII output

Options 1 through 5

The ASCII output is formatted as a fixed number of digits, with a fixed decimal place.

Option 0

The RAWS 7 (Remote Automated Weather Station, seven data values) format expects data to be stored in one, two, or three arrays, with seven data points in each array.  Other output will cause this instruction to behave unpredictably.

The data is formatted as follows:

Data

Point	Description	Units	Format

1	Hourly total rainfall	inches	xx.xx

2	Hourly average wind speed	MPH	xxx

3	Hourly vector average wind direction	degrees	xxx

4	Sample air temperature	Deg. F	xxx

5	Hourly average RH	percent	xxx

6	Hourly average fuel stick temp.	Deg. F	xxx

7	Hourly average battery voltage	VDC	xx.x


Buffer Control

Code	Description

0	self-timed buffer, appends the new data to the old

1	self-timed buffer, writes over the old data

2	random buffer, appends the new data to the old

3	random buffer, writes over the old data

9	Erases random buffer without writing any data

Note:   For more information about the buffers, see transmitter's buffer.


FWD/REF Power Location

Enter the starting input location that will store the forward power reading.  The next consecutive location will automatically store the reflected power reading.  If you enter a 0 for this parameter, the values for forward and reflected power will not be saved in an input location.

For more information about forward and reflected power, see forward and reflected power.

Example:   When the location number of this entry is 10, the forward power will be stored in input location number 10 and the reflected power will be stored in input location number 11.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 125 -- SDC2/ARGOS

A Program Control Instruction that sends final storage data to an Argos satellite via a SAT SDC/ARGOS transmitter.  Each time Instruction 125 is executed, all new data in the active final storage area will be sent to the transmitter.  The result of a data transmission attempt is stored in the input location specified in Parameter 1.

Note:   Argos data packets can be up to 32 bytes (or 16 final storage locations).  The SAT SDC/ARGOS transmitter can hold up to 4 data packets.  If multiple packets are sent, they will be transmitted one at a time separated by the repeat interval.  Refer to the transmitter's manual for additional information.


Return Code Location

Enter the input location in which the result code for the data transmission to the transmitter will be stored.  The description of the codes are as follows:

Code Returned	Description

0	Packet received by transmitter and acknowledged as good.

1	No new data in the active final storage area to send.

2	STX character not received from the transmitter.  Transmitter is possibly not connected or is transmitting data to the satellite.

3	Character other than STX received from the transmitter module.  Possible bad connection.

4	Packet was received by transmitter but is acknowledged as bad.  Possible bad checksum due to poor connection.

5	Packet was received by transmitter but no response is returned within the time-out period.  Transmitter may be transmitting data.

6	Datalogger serial port is unavailable.  It may be in use by another device.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 130 -- Status Monitor

An Input/Output Instruction that stores in an input location an error count or status information from the datalogger's *B mode.

Instruction 130 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Options

•	Parameter 2 -- Input Location


Option Code

Except for option 3, indexing this entry will store *B's status information and then clear the *B value.  If this entry is not indexed, the error count will be stored.  For information about indexing parameters, see Indexing Parameters.

Option	Description

     0	Read watchdog or E08 errors

     1	Read table overruns

     2	Read low 12 V detection

     3	Read lithium battery voltage level (indexing does nothing)

     4	Read Flash errors (CR10X-1M, CR10X-2M only)


Input Location

Enter the input location that will store the error count or the *B status information.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 131 - Extended Vibrating Wire

An Input/Output Instruction that excites a Slope Indicator vibrating wire sensor with a swept frequency (from low to high), then measures the period of the response and calculates frequency in Hertz.

An AVW1 or AVW4 Vibrating Wire Interface is usually required with these sensors.  A delay of at least 25 ms between excitation and measurement is recommended.

Instruction 131 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- Range Options

•	Parameter 3 -- Single-Ended Channel

•	Parameter 4 -- Excitation Channel

•	Parameter 5 -- Start Frequency

•	Parameter 6 -- End Frequency

•	Parameter 7 -- Sweep

•	Parameter 8 -- Number of Steps

•	Parameter 9 -- Delay after Excitation before Measurement

•	Parameter 10 -- Cycles

•	Parameter 11 -- Delay between Reps

•	Parameter 12 -- Input Location

•	Parameter 13 -- Multiplier

•	Parameter 14 -- Offset


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

By pressing the F4 function before entering the REPS value, the excitation is only applied to the first REP.  Otherwise, each REP uses the same excitation.  Each measurement also uses the same starting frequency, ending frequency, sweep, number of steps, delay before measurement, cycles, multiplier, and offset.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of sensors that will be measured with this instruction.  The sensors must be wired in consecutive channels.

By pressing the F4 function before entering the REPS value, the excitation is only applied to the first REP.  Otherwise, each REP uses the same excitation.  Each measurement also uses the same starting frequency, ending frequency, sweep, number of steps, delay before measurement, cycles, multiplier, and offset.


Range Options

Code	Max. Freq.

   1	8 kHz @ 2 mV peak-to-peak

   2	20 kHz @ 3 mV peak-to-peak

   3	50 kHz @ 12 mV peak-to-peak

   4	200 kHz @ 2 V peak-to-peak

Note:   The output period is in microseconds.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.  If you're using an old CR10 silver wiring panel, see SE Chart.


Single-Ended (SE) Channel

Enter the analog channel where the sensor has been wired.  When REPS are greater than 1, this entry is the first sensor's channel.

On the CR10X and black CR10 wiring panel, the single-ended channel numbers are above the differential channel numbers.


Excitation Channel Options

0x 	Excites all REPS with the same excitation channel.

1x	Increments the excitation channel with each REP.

Where x is the excitation channel.

Examples:

If the code is 01, all REPS are excited with excitation channel E1.

If the code is 12 and there are 2 REPS, the first sensor is excited with E2 and the second sensor is excited with E3.


Starting Frequency

Enter in Hertz the lowest frequency of the sweep.


Ending Frequency

Enter in Hertz the highest frequency of the sweep.


Sweep

Enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, to sweep between the specified frequencies.


Number of Steps

Enter the number of steps to use while sweeping from the starting frequency to the ending frequency.


Delay after Excitation before Measurement

Enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, to delay after the excitation before the measurement is made.

Note:   A delay of at least 40 ms between excitation and measurement is recommended.


Cycles

Enter the number of cycles that will be measured.


Delay between Reps

Enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, before the excitation will be applied to the next repetition.


Location

Enter the input location that will store the Hertz value obtained after the number of cycles specified in parameter 10.

The next consecutive location will store the result after one fifth the number of cycles specified in parameter 10.  Typically the first value is the one to use.

For more information, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 132 - Settling Time

An Input/Output Instruction that allows you to adjust the amount of time the datalogger will wait for the sensor's signal to settle before integration begins.  The settling time is entered in parameter 1.

Advantages of using this instruction

•	Low Impedance Sensors with Short Cables -- Because the signal of these sensors settles faster than the default settling time of 0.45 ms, this instruction allows you to decrease the settling time and shorten the execution time of the measurement instruction.

•	High Impedance Sensors with Long Cables -- Because the default settling time of 0.45 ms may not be long enough, this instruction allows you to increase the settling time to insure the accuracy of the measurement.

Note:   This instruction affects only those measurement instructions which reside in the same table as Instruction 132.  All analog measurements prior to the occurrence of Instruction 132 will use the default settling time of 450 microseconds.

At the end of each scan, the settling time is reset to the default.  The use of multiple Instruction 132s is also allowed so that different settling times can be set for each sensor.


Settling Time (ms)

Enter the settling time in milliseconds.

Minimum value -- 0.2 ms if the range code for the sensor's measurement instruction is 1, 11, 21, or 31; otherwise the minimum value is 0.1 ms.

Maximum value -- 50 ms.

Note:   This instruction affects only those measurement instructions which reside in the same table as Instruction 132.  All analog measurements prior to the occurrence of Instruction 132 will use the default settling time of 450 microseconds.

At the end of each scan, the settling time is reset to the default.  The use of multiple Instruction 132s is also allowed so that different settling times can be set for each sensor.


Instruction 189 -- SDM LI-7500

An Input/Output Instruction that communicates via SDM with the LI-COR LI-7500 Gas Analyzer.

Instruction 189 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Repetitions

•	Parameter 2 -- SDM Address

•	Parameter 3 -- Option

•	Parameter 4 -- Location

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.


Repetitions

Enter the number of LI-7500 gas analyzers connected to the datalogger.  When the repetitions are greater than 1, the SDM address is sequentially incremented.  The maximum number of repetitions for this instruction is three.

For more information, see General Repetition Information.


Repetitions

Enter the number of LI-7500 gas analyzers connected to the datalogger.  When the repetitions are greater than 1, the SDM address is sequentially incremented.  The maximum number of repetitions for this instruction is three.


SDM Address

Enter the unique address for the LI-7500 with which the datalogger will communicate.

The hex address must be entered as a base 4 (see chart).

SDM address	Base 4 value

00	00

01	01

02	02

03	03

04	10

05	11

06	12

07	13  <-- LI-COR factory default

08	20

09	21

10	22

11	23

12	30

13	31

14	32

The SDM address is sequentially incremented when the Repetitions option is greater than 1.  The maximum number of Repetitions permitted with this instruction is 3.

Note:  The SDM address is factory set to 07 (i.e., a base 4 value of 13).  Each SDM device on the SDM bus MUST have a unique address.  The LI-7500 PC support software is used to assign the SDM address.  The LI-7500 Instruction Manual contains more information on LI-7500 addresses.


Option

This option code is used to specify the data to be requested from the SDM specified in Parameter 2.  The values requested are stored in sequential Input Locations, starting with the Input Location specified in Parameter 4.

Code	Description:

0	Get CO2 and H20 molar density (mmol/m^3)

1	Get CO2 and H20 absorptance

2	Get internal pressure estimate (kPA), auxiliary measurement A, auxiliary measurement B, and cooler voltage (V)

3	Get cell diagnostic value, output bandwidth (Hz), programmed delay [230 + (delay * 6.579)] (msec)

4	Get all data (CO2 molar density (mmol/m^3), H20 molar density (mmol/m^3), CO2 absorptance, H20 absorptance, internal pressure estimate (kPA), auxiliary measurement A, auxiliary measurement B, cooler voltage (V), cell diagnostic value, output bandwidth (Hz), and programmed delay [230 + (delay * 6.579)] (msec))

5	Get CO2 and H20 molar density (mmol/m^3) and internal pressure estimate (kPa)


Location

Enter the input location that will store the first data value.  The number of input locations used depends upon the number of Reps defined and the Option used in Parameter 3:

Selected Option	Required

(Parameter 3)	Input Locations

0	Reps * 2

1	Reps * 2

2	Reps * 4

3	Reps * 3

4	Reps * 11

5	Reps * 3

Note:   Edlog allocates only one of the input locations needed for this instruction.  The additional input locations must be inserted manually using the Input Location Editor.  For information on manually inserting input locations, refer to Manually Inserting Input Locations Into Edlog.

For more information about input locations, see Input Location Information.


Instruction 221 -- Transmit ALERT/IFLOWS Packet

A Program Control Instruction that transmits ALERT/IFLOWS packets.  This instruction is available as a special only.

Instruction 221 has the following parameters:

•	Parameter 1 -- Sensor ID

•	Parameter 2 -- Packet ID

•	Parameter 3 -- Transmission Warm-up Time Location


Sensor ID

Enter the Input Location that holds the sensor ID.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Packet ID

Enter the Input Location that holds the packet ID.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.


Transmission Warm-up Time

Enter the Input Location that holds the amount of warm-up time.

For a detailed description of input locations, see Input Location Information.